Mobile Admin Client Guide

Mobile Admin Client Installation and User Guide
software version 5.1
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide for Mobile Admin v. 5.1 CONTACT INFORMATION Rove Mobile Inc. 60 George Street, suite 203 Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1N 1J4 www.roveit.com Toll Free: 1 888 482 3646 (North America) Tel: 1 613 789 1818 (International) Fax: 1 613 789 6739 General inquiries: info@roveit.com SALES Email: sales@roveit.com Toll-Free: 1 888 482 3646, press 1 (North America) Tel: 1 613 789 1818, press 1 (International) TECHNICAL SUPPORT Email: support@roveit.com Toll-Free: 1 888 482 3646, press 2 (North America) Tel: 1 613 789 1818, press 2 (International) TRADEMARKS
Copyright 2010 Rove Mobile Inc. All rights reserved. Rove, Mobile Admin, and Roves logo are marks of Rove Mobile Inc. All rights reserved. The BlackBerry and RIM families of related marks, images and symbols are the exclusive properties of Research In Motion Limited. RIM, Research In Motion, and BlackBerry are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and may be pending or registered in other countries. Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Server are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other brands, product names, company names, trademarks, and service marks are the properties of their respective owners. This document is provided as is and Rove Mobile Inc. (Rove) assumes no responsibility for any typographical, technical, or other inaccuracies in this document. Rove reserves the right to periodically change information that is contained in this document; however, Rove makes no commitment to provide any such changes, updates, enhancements, or other additions to this document to you in a timely manner or at all. ROVE MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, OR COVENANTS, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, DURABILITY, TITLE, OR RELATED TO THE PERFORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF ANY SOFTWARE REFERENCED HEREIN, OR PERFORMANCE OF ANY SERVICES REFERENCED HEREIN). IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, NEITHER ROVE NOR ITS AFFILIATED COMPANIES AND THEIR RESPECTIVE DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, OR CONSULTANTS SHALL BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER BE THEY DIRECT, ECONOMIC, COMMERCIAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, EVEN IF ROVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OF BUSINESS REVENUE OR EARNINGS, LOST DATA, DAMAGES CAUSED BY DELAYS, LOST PROFITS, OR A FAILURE TO REALIZE EXPECTED SAVINGS. This document might contain references to third-party sources of information and/or third-party web sites (Third-Party Information). Rove does not control, and is not responsible for, any Third-Party Information, including, without limitation, the content, accuracy, copyright compliance, legality, decency, links, or any other aspect of Third-Party Information. The inclusion of Third-Party Information in this document does not imply endorsement by Rove of the third party in any way. Any dealings with third parties, including, without limitation, compliance with applicable licenses, and terms and conditions are solely between you and the third party. Rove shall not be responsible or liable for any part of such dealings. Certain features outlined in this document may require additional development or third-party products and/or services for access to corporate applications. Installation and use of third-party products and services with Roves products and services may require one or more patent, trademark, or copyright licenses in order to avoid infringement of the intellectual property rights of others. You are solely responsible for acquiring any such licenses. To the extent that such intellectually property licenses may be required, Rove expressly recommends that you do not install or use these products until all such applicable licenses have been acquired by you or on your behalf. Your use of third-party software shall be governed by and subject to you agreeing to the terms of separate software licenses, if any, for those products or services. Any third-party products and services that are provided with Roves products and services are provided "as is". Rove makes no representation, warranty, or guarantee whatsoever in relation to the third-party products or services and Rove assumes no liability whatsoever in relation to the third-party products and services even if Rove has been advised of the possibility of such damages or can anticipate such damages.
License Agreement
ii Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
1. Definitions In this Agreement, the following terms shall have the following meanings, respectively. CPU means a single central processing unit within a computer. Licensee means the individual or entity that has purchased Program licenses for use by Users in its internal business operations and not for the purposes of resale, relicensing or other redistribution. Location means a geographical location where Licensee normally carries on business, at which Users are accessing the Program for Licensees own internal business purposes. Program means the Rove software, in object code form only, and any related printed or electronic documentation. Server means a network server that contains one CPU. Users means the number of authorized users (based on the number of valid and existing licenses purchased) who are authorized by Licensee to access and use the Program. 2. Grant of License In consideration of the payment of the license fee for the Program, and subject to the terms of this Agreement, Rove Inc. Rove grants to Licensee a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited and restricted license to use the object code version of the Program for Licensees own internal business purpose as follows: a) install the Program on Server(s) and at the Location(s) approved by Rove at the time of the Program license purchase; b) allow Users to access the Program using a Rove-approved device for which the license was purchased, only for Licensees internal business purposes, provided that, as a condition of access and use, such Users comply with the provisions of Sections 2 and 3; and c) make one (1) additional copy of the Program in machine-readable form solely for backup purposes. 3. Exclusions Except as expressly authorized under this Agreement, Licensee is prohibited from doing any of the following things to the fullest extent permitted by law: a) sublease, lease, assign, sell, resell, license, re-license, distribute, rent, export, re-export, permit concurrent use of or grant other rights in the Program; b) provide use of the Program in a computer service business, third party outsourcing facility or service, service bureau arrangement, network, time-sharing or interactive cable television arrangement to users who are not properly licensed by Rove; c) transfer this Agreement or any license to use the Program; d) translate, reverse engineer, modify, adapt, create derivative works, decompile, merge, separate or disassemble any part of the Program; or e) transfer the Program to any other Server or Location without the prior written consent of Rove (transfers may be subject to Roves then-current transfer fees). 4. Payment License fees are due and payable net 30 days from the date of Roves invoice to the Licensee. Payment shall be made in full without deduction for any sales, withholding, use or other taxes (excluding taxes on our net income) or similar charges, which shall be borne exclusively by Licensee and, to the extent required by applicable law, collected by Rove from Licensee. 5.Ownership The Program is licensed, not sold, and is protected by various laws and international treaties. All right, title and interest (including all copyrights and patent rights) in and to the Program shall, at all times, remain with Rove or its licensors. Licensee shall acquire no right whatsoever to all or any part of the Program except the right to use the Program in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Licensee acknowledges and agrees that the Program is the confidential information of Rove and contains developments, processes, designs, concepts, inventions, techniques, confidential and proprietary information and know-how and trade secrets, the disclosure of which could cause irreparable harm to Rove. Rove and its licensors reserve all rights not expressly granted to Licensee. Licensee must fully reproduce any copyright or other notice marked on any part of the Program on all authorized copies and must not alter or remove any such copyright or other notice. 6. No Warranty TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE PROGRAM AND ANY ASSOCIATED SERVICES ARE PROVIDED BY Rove ON AN AS IS BASIS, AND THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, REPRESENTATIONS OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, ARISING BY STATUTE, OPERATION OF LAW OR OTHERWISE, REGARDING THE PROGRAM OR ANY OTHER PRODUCT OR SERVICE PROVIDED HEREUNDER OR IN CONNECTION HEREWITH. Rove DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OR MERCHANTABLE QUALITY, MERCHANTIBILITY, DURABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, LACK OF VIRUSES, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF RESPONSES, RESULTS, LACK OF NEGLIGENCE AND/OR LACK OF WORKMANLIKE EFFORT. Rove DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROGRAM WILL BE ERROR-FREE OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. NO REPRESENTATION OR OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO STATEMENTS REGARDING PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM OR SERVICES THAT IS NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT, WILL BE DEEMED TO BE A WARRANTY. LICENSEE MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION AND SO THE FOREGOING MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE TO YOU. 7. Limitation of Liability
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
iii
THE ENTIRE RISK, AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM, IS ASSUMED BY LICENSEE. TO THE GREATEST EXTENT PERMISSABLE BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, TORT (INCLUDING STRICT LIABILITY AND NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, SHALL ROVE, ITS AGENTS, REPRESENTATIVES OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOST OR DAMAGED DATA, OR OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF ADVICES OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR IF SUCH DAMAGES ARE FORSEEABLE. Rove SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR FAILURES RESULTING FROM THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OR SERVICES WITH WHICH THE PROGRAM IS USED OR FOR FAILURES OF THE INTERNET (INCLUDING INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS). FURTHER, Rove DOES NOT WARRANT THE ENCRYPTION CAPABILITIES OF THE PROGRAM, AND SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY FAILURE OF SUCH ENCRYPTION (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, BREACH BY THIRD PARTIES OR HACKERS). THE MAXIMUM AGGREGATE LIABILITY OF ROVE AND ITS AGENTS, REPRESENTATIVES AND LICENSORS IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENTS OR THE PROGRAM, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING STRICT LIABILITY AND NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL NOT EXCEED THE LICENSE FEES PAID BY LICENSEE TO Rove UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR THE PROGRAM GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IN THE EVENT OF A FUNDAMENTAL BREACH OR A BREACH OF THE FUNDAMENTAL TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. The limited warranty, exclusive remedies and limited liability set out herein are fundamental elements of the basis of the bargain between Rove and Licensee. Rove would not be able to provide the Program on an economic basis without such limitations. 8. Term and Termination Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the license granted under this Agreement shall remain in effect for a period of one (1) year. Thereafter, this Agreement shall automatically renew for additional one-year terms unless Licensee provides Rove with written notice of termination at least thirty (30) days prior to the end of the then-current annual period. Rove may terminate this Agreement due to Licensees failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement if after thirty (30) days written notice such failure remains uncured to the satisfaction of Rove, except that, in the event of a breach of Section 5, this Agreement shall automatically terminate without further notice. Upon termination by either party or for any reason, Licensee agrees to promptly cease all use of the Program and purge all copies of the Program from all computer systems on which it was stored, return to Rove all physical copies of the Program and any other confidential information, and make immediate payment of any outstanding fees owed to Rove. IF THIS PROGRAM IS A TRIAL VERSION, this licence shall be effective for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date Licensee acquired the Program. 9. General US Government End Users: the Program (i) was developed exclusively at private expense; (ii) is a trade secret of Rove for all purposes of the Freedom of Information Act or its successor legislation or any other disclosure statute, regulation or provision; (iii) is commercial computer software subject to limited utilization (Restricted Rights); and (iv) including all copies of the Program, in all respects is and shall remain proprietary to Rove or its licensors. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government or any person or entity acting on its behalf is subject to Restricted Rights and all applicable restrictions for software developed exclusively at private expense as set forth in: (i) for the DoD, the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or any successor clause, and (ii) for all government agencies, the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 or any successor clause. The U.S. Government must refrain from changing or removing any insignia or lettering from the Program or from producing copies of the Program and manuals (except one copy of the Program for backup purposes). Use of the Program shall be limited to the facility for which it is acquired. All other U.S. Government personnel using the Program are hereby on notice that use of the Program is subject to restrictions that are the same as, or similar to, those specified above. The manufacturer/owner is Rove Inc., 60 George St., Suite 203, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, K1N 1J4. Export/Import Restrictions: Licensee represents and warrants that (a) no relevant agency has suspended, revoked or denied Licensees export and/or import privileges; (b) Licensee is not located in or under the control of a national or resident of, a jurisdiction where this transaction is prohibited; and (c) Licensee shall not, in any manner whatsoever, either remove, convey, export, import or transmit the Program from or to Licensees jurisdiction in violation of the applicable laws and regulations. Governing Law: this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, without giving effect to: that body of law applicable to choice of law, or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, and/or its implementing and/or successor legislation. The parties agree that the courts of such jurisdiction constitute a convenient forum for any litigation and both parties attorn and submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of such courts. Except to the extent required by law, the parties waive trial by jury. Each party hereby agrees to comply with all applicable laws, regulations and government offers in performing its obligations under this Agreement. Assignment: licensee may not transfer or assign this Agreement without the prior written consent of Rove, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Rove may assign and/or transfer all or part of its rights and obligations under this Agreement at any time. This Agreement shall obligate and benefit the parties, their personal representatives, heirs, successors and assigns. Entire Agreement: this Agreement is the entire agreement between the parties with respect to its subject matter and supersedes and replaces all prior oral or written agreements, representations, negotiations, or understandings between the parties relating to such subject matter. No change or modification to this Agreement shall be valid unless it is in writing and signed by a representative of both parties. No provisions in any purchase orders, or in any documentation employed by or on behalf of either party in connection with this Agreement, regardless of the date of such documentation, will affect the terms of this Agreement, even if such documentation is accepted by the receiving party, and such provisions
iv Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
will be deemed deleted. The division of this Agreement into sections and the insertion of headings are for convenient reference only, and shall affect neither the construction nor the interpretation of this Agreement. Severance waiver: if any provision of this Agreement is declared by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such a provision shall be severed from the Agreement, the provision in question shall be deemed to be replaced with a valid and enforceable provision most closely reflecting the intent and purpose of the original provision and the other provisions shall remain in full force and effect. No party will be deemed to have waived the exercise of any right that it holds under this Agreement unless such waiver is made in writing. Failure or delay by either party to exercise any of its rights, powers or remedies hereunder shall not constitute a waiver of those rights, powers or remedies. The single or partial exercise of a right, power or remedy shall not prevent its subsequent exercise or the exercise of any other right, power or remedy Indemnity: licensee agrees to indemnify and hold Rove Inc. harmless against any and all third party proceedings, causes of action, suits, damages, losses, liability, costs and expenses (including reasonable legal fees) whatsoever that may arise, either directly or indirectly, in any connection with any act or omission on the part of Licensee or Users, or its use of the Program. Force Majeure: except for Licensees payment obligations hereunder, neither party shall be responsible for delays or failure or performance resulting from acts beyond the reasonable control of such party. Language: the original of this Agreement has been written in English and Licensee waives any right it may have under the laws od the Licensees territory t have this Agreement written in any other language. Licensee represents that it has the ability to read and write in English and has read and understood this Agreement. If this Agreement is translated into a language other than English, the English version and interpretation shall govern and prevail. All communications between the parties hereunder shall be in English.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
vi
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Chapter 1 Introduction to Mobile Admin 1

About this document 1 About Mobile Admin 1
Supported servers 1 Supported wireless devices 2
Using Mobile Admin with BlackBerry smartphones 2

Mobile Admin architecture with a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 2 Mobile Admin architecture without a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 3 Mobile Admin security with a BlackBerry 4
Using Mobile Admin with Windows Mobile, Android and Apple devices 5
Mobile Admin architecture 5 Mobile Admin security with a Windows Mobile/Android/Apple wireless device 6
Using Mobile Admin with the Web Interface 7 Getting startedan overview 7
Chapter 2 Installing the Mobile Admin Client 9

Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on a BlackBerry smartphone 9
Installing over-the-air 9 Installing using the BlackBerry Desktop Manager 9 Minimum system requirements 9
To install the Mobile Admin Client over-the-air 10 To install the Mobile Admin Client using the Desktop Manager 10 To set up the Mobile Admin Client 11 To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client 12 To uninstall the Mobile Admin Client 12 Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Windows Mobile devices 13
About installing the software wirelessly 13 About installing the software from the desktop 13 Minimum system requirements for Windows Mobile devices 13
To install the Mobile Admin Client wirelessly 13 To install the Mobile Admin Client from the desktop 14 To set up the Mobile Admin Client 14 To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client 15 To uninstall Mobile Admin Client 15 Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Android devices 15
About installing the software wirelessly 15 About installing the software from the desktop 15 Minimum system requirements for Android devices 15
To install the Mobile Admin Client wirelessly 16 To install the Mobile Admin Client through the Android Market 16 To set up the Mobile Admin Client 16 To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client 17 To uninstall Mobile Admin Client 17 Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Apple iPhone/iPod Touch devices 18
Minimum system requirements for Apple iPhone/iPod Touch 18
To install the Mobile Admin Client through the Apple App Store 18 To set up the Mobile Admin Client 18 To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client 19 To uninstall Mobile Admin Client 19
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
vii
Chapter 3 Getting started with Mobile Admin 21

Using the Mobile Admin Client on a BlackBerry smartphone 21 To access the menu 21 To select a menu item 21 To go back to the previous screen 21 To refresh the screen 21 Using the Mobile Admin Client on a Windows Mobile device 22 To access the menu 22 To select a menu item 22 To go back to the previous screen 22 To refresh the screen 22 Using the Mobile Admin Client on an Android device 22 To access the menu 22 To select a menu item 22 To go back to the previous screen 22 To refresh the screen 22 Using the Mobile Admin Client on an Apple iPhone/iPod Touch device 23 To access the menu 23 To select a menu item 23 To go back to the previous screen 23 To refresh the screen 23 Using Mobile Admin on the Web Interface 23 To access the Mobile Admin Web Interface 23 Logging in and logging out 24 To log in to Mobile Admin 24 To change which server to log into, or change server settings 25 To log out of Mobile Admin 25 To close the Mobile Admin Client application 25 Navigating the Mobile Admin home screen 25 Manage Services 26 To add a service to your Manage Services list 26 To remove a service from your Manage Services list 26 To manage a service 26 To sort the Manage Services list by Host 27 Manage Servers 27 To add a server to your server list 27 To remove a server from your server list 27 To add a server or servers to your server list by browsing the network 28 The servers now appear in your Manage Servers list. 28 To manage a server 28
Organizing servers 28
To sort the Manage Servers list by Service 28 To toggle back to sorting by host name, click Sort by Host on the menu. 29 To create a server folder 29 To create a server sub-folder 29 To add a server to a folder/sub-folder 29
Credentials 29
To modify credentials for an individual server 29 To apply credentials to a group of servers 30

viii Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide Mobile Admin v. 5.0
Global Folders (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 30 To enter a global folder 31 Shortcuts 31 To create a shortcut 31 To access a shortcut 31 To edit a shortcut 31 To delete a shortcut 32 Setting the Default Screen 32 To set the default screen 32
Chapter 4 Managing Microsoft Windows 33

Using the command prompt 33 To use the command prompt 33 Using Windows PowerShell 34 To use Windows PowerShell 34 Using dial-up connections 34 To use a dial-up connection 34 Using the Event Viewer 34 To view event logs 34 To clear an event log 35 Managing drives, folders and files with File Explorer 35 To view drive properties and disk space usage 35 To browse folders 35 To create a new folder 35 To delete a folder 36 To view or change folder permissions 36 To add a trustee to a folder 36 To remove a trustee from a folder 37 To delete a file 37 To view file properties 37 To FTP a file to a server 37 To email a file 38 To move a file 38 To copy a file 39 To view an image file 39 To view or edit a text file 39 To view or change file permissions 40 To add a trustee to a file 40 To remove a trustee from a file 40 Using Net Send 41 To send a pop-up message to a computer desktop 41 Using NSLookup 41 To use NSLookup 41 Using the ping function 42 To ping an IP address 42 Managing printers 42 To view printers 42
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
ix
To view print jobs 42 To cancel a print job 42 To cancel all print jobs 43 To pause or resume a printer 43 Restarting servers 43 To restart a server 43 To shutdown a server 44 To log off a user who is currently logged in 44 Running programs 44 To run a program 44 Managing scheduled tasks 44 To view scheduled tasks 44 To create a new task 45 To create a schedule for a task 45 To change a schedule for a task 46 To delete a schedule for a task 46 To delete a scheduled task 46 Managing services 47 To view services 47 To stop a service 47 To start a service 47 To start a service with parameters 47 To pause a service 48 To resume a paused service 48 To restart a service 48 To change the startup mode for a service 49 Managing shared folders 49 To view shared folders 49 To share an existing folder or drive 49 To stop sharing a folder or drive 50 To edit the description or change maximum users for a shared folder or drive 50 To change permissions for a shared folder or drive 50 To add a trustee to a shared folder 51 Viewing system information 51 To view system information 51 Managing processes with the Task Manager 52 To view processes 52 To kill a process 52 To view performance 52 Managing Terminal Services 52 To view a Terminal Services connection 52 To reset a Terminal Services connection 53 To disconnect a Terminal Services connection 53 To send a message using Terminal Services 53 Tracing a route 53 To trace a route 54 Managing users and groups 54 To view users 54
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
To view groups 54 To create a user 54 To reset a user password 55 To change user settings 55 To rename a user 56 To add a user to a group (when managing users) 56 To remove a user from a group (when managing users) 56 To create a new group 57 To rename a group 57 To add a user or group to a group (when managing groups) 57 To remove a user or group from a group (when managing groups) 58
Chapter 5 Connecting with SSH/Telnet 59

About SSH/Telnet 59
Supported network devices 59
SSH/Telnet security 59
Encryption for all SSH connections 59 Authentication 59
Getting started with SSH/Telnet 60 To access a server using SSH/Telnet 60 Select Connect on the menu if the default connection settings are suitable. To modify default connection settings, see Managing connection settings on page 60.To disconnect a SSH/Telnet session 60
Managing connection settings 60
To manage connection settings (BlackBerry, Android, Windows Mobile, iPhone/iPod Touch) 61

Managing server properties 63
To manage SSH/Telnet port numbers 63 Using the Terminal Screen 63 To enable or disable scrolling (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile and Android devices only) 63 To enable or disable local input mode (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile and Android devices only) 63 To change the font size on the fly 64 To enter control (CTRL) characters 64 To enter alternate (ALT) characters 64 To enter special keys 65
About macros 65
To configure macros 65 To delete macros 65 To send characters without sending a carriage return (CR) or enter character (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile devices only) 65 To clear server key cache 65 To enable or disable autoscrolling mode (Android devices only) 65 To enable or disable the soft keyboard (Android devices only) 66
Chapter 6 Connecting with RDP/VNC 67

About RDP/VNC 67 RDP/VNC security 67
Security with a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 67 Security for Terminal Services and Remote Desktop connections 67
Preparing for RDP/VNC connections 68
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
xi
Getting started with RDP/VNC 68 To access a computer using RDP/VNC 68 To disconnect a RDP/VNC session 69 Managing connection settings 69 To manage connection settings 69 Managing server properties 70 To manage RDP/VNC port numbers 70 Using RDP/VNC 70 To move the mouse 71 To send a left mouse click 71 To send right mouse click 71 To send double mouse click 71 To send keyboard strokes on devices with a QWERTY keyboard 71 Press the keys on the device keyboard. For additional symbols, press SYM.To send keyboard strokes on devices with a 12-key keyboard 71 To send extra commands 71 Press ALT+SYM on the device keyboard, or select Show Extras on the menu.To send CTRL+ALT+DEL 71 To zoom out and see a larger portion of the screen 72 To zoom in and see more detail 72 To view the total amount of network data used thus far (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile only) 72 To enable or disable the soft keyboard (Android devices only) 72
Chapter 7 Managing Microsoft Active Directory 73

Browsing the Active Directory tree 73 To browse the Active Directory tree 73 Managing users 73 To create a user 73 To view a user 74 To edit user settings 74 To reset a user password 75 To add a user to a group 75 To remove a user from a group 75 To disable a user 75 To enable a disabled user 76 To unlock a user 76 To rename a user 76 To delete a user 76 To edit a user profile 76 Managing groups 77 To create a group 77 To view/edit a group 77 To rename a group 78 To add a member to a group 78 To remove a member from a group 79 To create a new group email address 79 To add a group email address 79 To set a primary group email address 80 To delete a group email address 80 To delete a group 80 To create an organizational unit 80
xii Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide Mobile Admin v. 5.0
Managing computers 81 To view computers 81 To add a computer 81 To delete a computer 81
Chapter 8 Managing Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 83

Browsing the Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 tree 83 To browse the Exchange 2000/2003 tree 83 Managing Exchange 2000/2003 mailboxes 83 To view a user mailbox 83 To create a mailbox 84 To move a mailbox 84 To delete a mailbox 84 To establish an email address 84 To delete an email address 85 To set a primary email address for a user 85 To change mailbox delivery restrictions 85 To change forwarding address settings 86 To change mailbox storage limits 86 Managing mailbox stores 86 To change default delivery settings 86 To mount or dismount a message store 87 To view or change mailbox store properties 87 To find or view details for a mailbox 88 Managing message queues 89 To view a message queue 89 To freeze a message queue 90 To unfreeze a frozen message queue 90 To force a connection queue 90 To delete all messages in a queue with or without an NDR 90 To enumerate messages 90 To freeze a single message in a queue 90 To unfreeze a frozen message in a queue 91 To delete a single message in a queue with or without an NDR 91
Chapter 9 Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

About Microsoft Exchange 2007 for Mobile Admin 93 To access the Microsoft Exchange 2007 interface 93 Organization Configuration 93 To access the Organization Configuration section 93
Exchange Administrators 94
93
To view the list of administrators 94 .To view administrator-specific information 94 To add an administrator 94 To remove an administrator 95
Hub Transport 95
To view transport settings 95
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
xiii
To set maximum send size 95 To set maximum receive size 96 To set maximum number of recipients 96 Server Configuration 96 To access the Server Configuration section 96
Mailbox 97
To view a mailbox/public folder database 97 To view mailbox/public folder database properties 97 To manage database settings 97 To mount a database 98 To dismount a database 98 Recipient Configuration 98 To access the Recipient Configuration section 99
Mailbox (All) 99
To view the list of mailboxes 99 To view mailbox properties 99 To manage mailbox properties 99 To hide a mailbox from Exchange address lists 100 To manage mailbox settings 100 To manage mailbox features 100 To move a mailbox 101 To manage mail flow settings 101 To manage a mailboxs email addresses 101 To remove or disable a mailbox 102 To create a mailbox filter 102 To add a mailbox 102
Mailbox (Filtered) 103
To create a mailbox filter (shortcut method) 103

Distribution Group (All) 103
To view the list of distribution groups 103 To create a distribution group filter 103 To create a new distribution group 104 To view distribution group properties 104 To manage distribution group properties 104 To view distribution group members 104 To manage distribution group mail flow settings 104 To view a distribution groups email address 105 To edit a distribution groups email address 105 To enable/disable the email address policy for a distribution group 105 To set a reply email address for a distribution group 106 To remove an email address from a distribution group 106 To add an email address to a distribution group 106 To disable a distribution group 107
Distribution Group (Filtered) 107
To create a distribution group filter (shortcut method) 107

Mail Contact (All) 107
To view the list of mail contacts 107 To create a mail contact filter 107 To create a new mail contact 108 To view mail contact properties 108 To manage mail contact properties 108 To manage mail contact mail flow settings 109
xiv Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide Mobile Admin v. 5.0
To view a mail contacts email address 109 To edit a mail contacts email address 109 To enable/disable the email address policy for a mail contact 109 To set a reply email address for a mail contact 110 To remove an email address from a mail contact 110 To add an email address to a mail contact 110 To disable a mail contact 111
Mail Contact (Filtered) 111
To create a mail contact filter (shortcut method) 111

Disconnected Mailbox 111
To reconnect a disconnected mailbox 111 Toolbox 112 To access the Toolbox section 112
Test Services 112
To view the list of Mircosoft Exchange 2007 servers 112 To test services 113
Test System Health 113
To test system health 113

Test Mail Flow 113
To locally test mail flow 113 To remotely test mail flow 113
Queue Viewer 114
To view a queue 114 To view queue details 114 To suspend a queue 114 To resume a queue 114 To retrieve a message from within a queue 115
Chapter 10 Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

Managing SQL Server instances 117 To view instances 117 To authenticate your credentials for the SQL server 117 To stop a running SQL Server instance 118 To start a stopped SQL Server instance 118 To pause a SQL Server instance 118 To resume a paused SQL Server instance 118 Managing SQL Server databases 119 To view databases 119 To view a list of tables in a database 119 To view table layout 119 To view table data 119 To view a view 120 To view or edit stored procedures 120 To create a stored procedure 120 To run an SQL query 120 To view database properties 121 To view database data files 121 To add database data files 121 To resize database data files 121 To delete database data files 122 To view database log files 122
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
117
xv
To add database log files 123 To resize database log files 123 To delete database log files 123 Managing SQL Server processes 124 To view processes 124 To kill a process 124 Managing the SQL Server Agent and jobs 125 To start/stop the SQL Server Agent 125 To view jobs 125 To start a job 126 To stop a job 126 To change a job 126 To delete a job 126 To view a job history 126 To clear a job history 127 Managing SQL Server replication 127 To view subscriptions 127 To start synchronization 127 To stop synchronization 127 To delete a subscription 128 To view the replication job history 128 To clear the replication job history 128 Managing the replication monitor 128 To view a list of agents 128 To view details for an agent 129 To start an agent 129 To stop an agent 129 To view or change agent profiles 129 To view agent history 129 Managing SQL Server logins 130 To view login information 130 To create a login 130 To edit a login 130 To delete a login 131 To reset a password 131
Chapter 11 Managing Microsoft Internet Information Services (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 133
Managing the IIS application 133 To access the IIS application 133 To restart IIS 133 To restore the IIS configuration from a backup 133 Managing web sites 134 To view the list of web sites 134 To view the list of virtual directories for a web site 134 To stop a web site 134 To start a stopped web site 134 To pause a web site 134 To resume a paused web site 135
xvi Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide Mobile Admin v. 5.0
To view or change a web site description 135 Managing virtual directories 135 To view subdirectories in a virtual directory 135 To view or change virtual directory properties 135 To view or edit document settings for a virtual directory 136 To point a virtual directory to a network share 136 To point a virtual directory to a local directory 136 To redirect a virtual directory to a URL 136 Managing FTP sites 137 To view a list of FTP sites 137 To view a list of virtual directories on an FTP site 137 To stop an FTP site 137 To start a stopped FTP site 137 To pause an FTP site 137 To resume a paused FTP site 138
Chapter 12 Managing Microsoft DHCP 139

Managing scopes and superscopes 139 To view DHCP scopes and superscopes 139 To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope 139 To create a superscope 139 To delete a superscope 140 To deactivate an activated superscope 140 To activate a deactivated superscope 140 To create a scope 140 To delete a scope 141 To add a scope to a superscope 141 To remove a scope from a superscope 141 To edit scope properties 141 To deactivate an activated scope 142 To activate a deactivated scope 142 To create scope reservations 142 To view or edit scope reservations 142 To delete scope reservations 143 To create scope exclusions 143 To view scope exclusions 143 To delete scope exclusions 143
Chapter 13 Managing Microsoft DNS 145

Viewing DNS information, managing zones, and adding records 145 To clear the server cache 145 To scavenge stale resource records 145 To view a list of forward lookup zones 145 To view a list of reverse lookup zones 146 To view a list of subdomains and resource records within a zone 146 To view a list of subdomains and resource records within a subdomain 146 To reload a zone 146 To pause a zone 146 To resume a paused zone 147
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
xvii
To add a new record (A, CNAME, MX and PTR) 147 To view or edit record properties (all types) 148
Chapter 14 Managing Microsoft Cluster Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 151
Managing cluster nodes 151 To view a list of nodes 151 To view node properties 151 To editing the node description 151 To view a list of network interfaces for a node 151 To view a list of active groups on a node 152 Managing groups 152 To view a list of groups 152 To view group properties 152 To edit the group description 152 To view preferred owners for a group 152 To add a preferred owner to a group 153 To remove a preferred owner from a group 153 To take an online group offline 153 To bring an offline group online 153 To move a group to the next node on the preferred owners list 153 To change group failback settings 153 To change group failover settings 154 Managing cluster resources 154 To view a list of resources 154 To view resource properties 154 To edit a resource description 155 To change a resource group 155 To view a list of resource dependencies 155 To remove a resource dependency 155 To take a resource offline 155 To bring a resource online 156 To initiate the failure of a resource 156
Chapter 15 Managing Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 157
Managing Operations Manager 157 To access Operations Manager 157 Alerts 157 To view alerts 157 To view alert details 157 To manage an alert 158 To resolve an alert 158 Computers 158 To view computers 158 To view computer health states 158 To resolve a computer health state 158 To invoke maintenance mode for a computer 159 To stop maintenance mode for a computer 159
xviii
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
Chapter 16 Managing Microsoft System Centre Mobile Device Manager 2008 SP1 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 161
Managing System Center Mobile Device Manager 161 To view a list of System Center Mobile Device Manager servers 161
All Managed Devices 161
To view a list of managed devices 161 To view device details 161 To create pre-enrollment 161
Blocked Devices 162
To view a list of blocked devices 162 To view blocked device details 162 To unblock a device 162
Pending Enrollments 162
To view a list of pending enrollments 163 To view pending enrollment details 163 To cancel an enrollment 163
Recent Wipes 163
To view a list of recent wipes 163 To view recent wipe details 163 To cancel a wipe 163
Chapter 17 Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 165

Logging in to the Domino server 165 To log in to the Domino server 165 Managing mailboxes 165 To view mailboxes 165 To delete mail from a mailbox 166 Managing people and groups 166 To view a list of people 166 To add a person 166 To search for a person 167 To view a person 167 To edit information about a person 167 To delete a person 167 To view or edit mail settings for a person 167 To view a list of groups 168 To add a group 168 To search for a group 168 To view group details 169 To edit group details 169 To delete a group 169 To view members of a group 169 To add members to a group 169 To remove members from a group 170 To reset an Internet password 170 To force a person to change their Internet password on next login 170 To edit password change intervals for a user 171 To reset a users password digest 171 To lockout a user ID, force a password check, or disable password checking for a user 171
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
xix
Managing administration requests 172 To view an administration request 172 To accept or reject an administration request 173 Managing server tasks 173 To view server tasks 173 To start a new server task 174 To stop a running server task 174 To restart a server task 174 To send a tell command to a server task 174 To stop a running port 175 To restart a port 175 To view a server log 175 Managing server documents 175 To view a server document 175 To edit the basics of a server document 176 To edit the security settings of a server document 176 Managing databases and templates 178 To view a database 178 To compact a database 178 To fixup a database 178 To delete a database 178 To view a template 179 To compact a template 179 To fixup a template 179 To delete a template 179 Sending Domino Console commands 179 To send a Domino Console command 180
Chapter 18 Managing Novell (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 181

Logging in to a Novell server 181 To log into a Novell server 181 To re-authenticate a Novell server 181 Managing eDirectory and NDS servers 182 To view an organization 182 To view the properties of an organization 182 Managing organizational units 182 To create an organizational unit 182 To view an organizational unit 183 To view or editing organizational unit properties 183 To rename an organizational unit 183 To delete an organizational unit 184 Managing users and groups 184 To create a user 184 To view or edit a user 184 To rename a user 185 To delete a user 185 To change user password settings 186 To change a user logon script 186
xx
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
To add a user to a group 187 To remove a user from a group 187 To create a group 187 To view or edit a group 188 To rename a group 188 To delete a group 188 To add a user to a group 189 To remove a user from a group 189 To search for an object (user or group) 189
Chapter 19 Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 191
Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 191 To view a list of BlackBerry Enterprise Servers 191 To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 191 To stop the Mobile Data Service 192 To restart the Mobile Data Service 192 To enable or disable the Mobile Data Service for a user 192 Managing users 193 To view a list of users 193 To search for a user 193 To view details for a known user 193 To add a user 194 To delete a user 194 To clear user statistics 194 To lock a wireless device and set a new user password 194 To set the owner information to be displayed on a wireless device 195 To kill a device 195 To set an activation password 196
Chapter 20 Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 197
Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 197 To set a non-standard BlackBerry Administration Service port 197 To view a list of BlackBerry Enterprise Servers 198 To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 198
Managing the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service 198
To start the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service 198 To stop the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service 198 To restart the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service 199 Managing users 199 To find a user 199 To view details for a user 199 To add a user 200 To set an activation password 200 To disable a user 200 To delete a user 201 To lock a wireless device and set a new user password 201 To set the owner information to be displayed on a wireless device 201
Mobile Admin v. 5.0 Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide xxi
To kill a device 201 To cancel a device kill 202 To disable BlackBerry service for a user 202 To move a user 202 To set a users IT policy 202 To detach a users IT policy 203 To generate an activation password for a user 203 To clear an activation password for a user 203 To resend a users service book 203 To set software configuration for a user 203 To detach software configuration information for a user 204
Chapter 21 Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

Managing databases 205 To add a database 205 To remove a database 205 Managing instances and sessions 205 To view instance configurations 206 To view session information 206 To kill a session 206 Managing schemas 206 To view information for a schema 206 To view columns and statistics for a table 207 To remove a table 207 To view a view 207 To create a view 207 To edit a view 208 To remove a view 208 To view a sequence 208 To create a sequence 209 To edit a sequence 209 To remove a sequence 210 To view a stored procedure 210 To create a stored procedure 210 To edit a stored procedure 210 To remove a stored procedure 211 Managing security 211 To view users 211 To create a user 211 To edit a user 212 To remove a user 212 To reset a password 212 To view the roles granted to a user 213 To add a new role to a user 213 To revoke a role that has been granted to a user 213 To view the system privileges that have been granted to a user 214 To add system privileges for a user 214 To revoke system privileges from a user 214 To view a list of available roles 214 To create a role 215
xxii Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide
205
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
To edit a role 215 To remove a role 215 To view the system privileges that have been granted to a role 215 To add additional system privileges to a role 216 To revoke system privileges from a role 216 To add roles to an existing role 216 To revoke roles from an existing role 216 To view a list of profiles 217 To create a profile 217 To remove a profile 218 To view or edit a profile 218 To edit the password policies of a profile 218 Managing storage 218 To view a list of tablespaces 219 To create a tablespace 219 To edit a tablespace 219 To remove a tablespace 219 To view a list of datafiles 220 To create a datafile 220 To edit a datafile 220 Running SQL queries 221 To run a SQL query 221
Chapter 22 Managing Citrix (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 223

Managing Citrix sessions 223 To view active Citrix sessions 223 To view details for an active Citrix session 223 To view process information for an active Citrix session 223 To reset a Citrix session 224 To logoff a Citrix session 224 To disconnect a Citrix session 224 To terminate user processes 225 To send a message to a Citrix user 225 Managing Citrix licenses 225 To view Citrix licenses and usage information 225
Chapter 23 Managing the RSA Authentication Manager (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 227
Managing RSA users and tokens 227 To search for a user 227 To view token information 227 To enable or disable a token 228 To reset an RSA SecurID token into New PIN mode 228
Chapter 24 Managing HP Integrated Lights Out (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 229
Managing iLO servers 229 To view user information 229 To view global or network settings 229
Mobile Admin v. 5.0 Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide xxiii
To view logs or log entry details 229 To view power information 230 To turn host power on or off (power down) 230 To turn UID on or off 230 To enter or change iLO authentication information 231
Chapter 25 Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

Managing the Backup Exec server 233 To change authentication settings for the Backup Exec server 233 To view the current status of Backup Exec services 233 To start Backup Exec services 234 To stop Backup Exec services 234 To view the current version of the Backup Exec server 234 Managing backup jobs 234 To view job properties 234 To view detailed information about a job 234 To view detailed information about the selections for a job 234 To run a job 235 To view selection lists 235 Managing job monitors 235 To view monitor details for a current job 235 To delete a current job 235 To run a current job 236 To view monitor details for a completed job 236 Managing active alerts 236 To respond to an active alert 236 Managing devices 237 To view details for stand-alone drives 237 To create an erase media job for a drive 237 To create an eject job for a drive 237 To create an inventory job for a drive 237 To view details for a robotic library device 238 To view details about a drive in a library 238 To erase a tape in a library 238 To label a tape in a library 238 To inventory a tape in a library 238 To unlock a library 239 To eject a tape carousel 239 To clean a drive in the carousel 239 To view details for backup-to-disk folders 239 Managing media 239 To view details for media 239
233
Chapter 26 Managing VMware Infrastructure (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 241

Managing VI servers 241 To view data centers/hosts/clusters on VMware Infrastructure 241 To find a VM 241
Events 242
xxiv
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
To view events 242 To view event details 242

Tasks 242
To view tasks 242 To view task details 242

Triggered Alarms 242
To view triggered alarms 242 To view triggered alarm details 243

Hosts 243
To view a host summary 243 To enter maintenance mode for a host 243 To reboot a host 243 To shutdown a host 243 To enter standby mode for a host 243
Virtual Machines 244
To view VM properties 244 To edit VM settings 244 To manage a VM 244 To turn on power to a VM 244 To turn off power to a VM 244 To suspend a VM 245 To gracefully shut down a VM 245 To gracefully restart a VM 245
Chapter 27 Managing Nagios (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 247

Managing the Nagios application 247 To set the Nagios Web Console Address 247 To access the Nagios application 247 To search for a host 248 To change Nagios credentials 248 To view service details 248 To view service state information 248 To manage the host machine 248 To view comments on the service 248 To add a comment about the service 248 To delete a comment 249 To schedule service downtime 249 To delete a scheduled service downtime occurance 249 To sort service details by status 249 To sort service details by service 250 To view service problems 250 To view unhandled service problems 250 To view host state information 250 To view host details 250 To view host state information 250 To manage the host machine 250 To view comments on the host machine 250 To add a comment about the host machine 251 To schedule host downtime 251 To sort host details by status 251 To view host problems 251
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
xxv
To view unhandled host problems 251 To view service detail information 251
Notifications 252
To view notifications 252
Chapter 28 Managing BMC Remedy Service Desk (Mobile Admin Professional Only)
Managing the Remedy Service Desk application 253 To set the BMC Remedy Service Desk port 253 To access the Remedy Service Desk application 253 To log in to Remedy Service Desk 254 To log out of Remedy Service Desk 254 To search for a Remedy Incident 254 To view details for a Remedy Incident 254 To edit a Remedy Incident 255 To change the status of a Remedy Incident 255 To indicate the reason for a change in status 255 To display Remedy Incident details 255 To edit an Incident Request 255 To reassign an incident 256 To view information about the origin of an incident 256 To modify a resolution date for an incident 256 To create work info 256 To edit work info 257
253
Chapter 29 Managing BMC Performance Manager Portal 259

Managing the BMC Portal application 259 To access the BMC application 259 To view elements within a group 259 To list elements 259 To manage elements 259 To list applications 260 To view applications for an element 260 To view parameters 260
Chapter 30 Managing Microsoft Hyper-V (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 261

Managing the Hyper-V application 261 To access the Microsoft Hyper-V application 261 To view the summary page 261 To change the VM state 261 To change VM settings 262 To view a summary of a VM snapshot 262 To create a snapshot of the VM 262 To apply a snapshot of the VM 262 To delete a snapshot of the VM 262 To manage the VM in Mobile Admin 263
xxvi
Mobile Admin v. 5.0
Introduction to Mobile Admin About this document
Introduction to Mobile Admin

About this document
This manual provides information about how Mobile Admin works, and detailed instructions for installing and using the Mobile Admin Client on your wireless device. This document does not provide information about how to use your wireless device. For instructions about how to use your wireless device, refer to the user documentation provided with the device.
Note
Before you install the Mobile Admin Client, the Mobile Admin Server must be installed and configured. For more information about installing and configuring the Mobile Admin Server, see the Mobile Admin Server Installation and Configuration Guide.
About Mobile Admin

Mobile Admin allows you to manage servers and computers on your network from anywhere, anytime, using your wireless device. Mobile Admin is a client-server application. The Mobile Admin Server software is installed on any one computer that has access to all the other servers in your network that you want to manage. The Mobile Admin Client software is installed on a wireless device, and can manage an unlimited number of servers. Supported servers You can use Mobile Admin to manage the following: Microsoft Windows computers and networks Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003* Microsoft SQL Server* Microsoft DHCP* Microsoft Cluster Servers* Microsoft Active Directory Microsoft Exchange 2007* Microsoft IIS* Microsoft DNS* Microsoft System Center Operations Manager* IBM Lotus Domino* BlackBerry Enterprise Server* Oracle* RSA Authentication Manager* SymantecBackupExec*
Microsoft System Center Mobile Device Manager* Novell eDirectory/NDS* Blackberry Enterprise Server 5* Citrix*
HP Integrated Lights Out (iLO)*
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Introduction to Mobile Admin Using Mobile Admin with BlackBerry smartphones
VMware Virtual Infrastructure* BMC Remedy Service Desk* Microsoft Hyper-V*
Nagios* BMC Performance Manager Portal* RDP, VNC, SSH, Telnet
* Mobile Admin Professional Only Mobile Admin allows you to use your wireless device to perform a full range of administrative tasks on these servers, including: managing users and groups, event logs, services, print jobs; rebooting servers; resetting passwords; editing server documents; and deleting mailbox messages.
Note
To manage Unix, Linux, AS/400, and Netware devices, routers and switches, Mobile Admin allows you to create Telnet/SSH connections. Telnet/SSH connections provide VT100, IBM 5250 and 3720 terminal emulation, support for SSH2, and key authentication. Mobile Admin also allows you to create RDP/VNC connections to Windows, Mac OS X, Linux, Solaris, QNX and OS/2 operating systems in order to view the screen and control the keyboard and mouse of a remote computer. Supported wireless devices You can install and use Mobile Admin on any of the following wireless devices: BlackBerry smartphones Windows Mobile devices Android devices Apple iPhone and iPod Touch Other wireless devices via the Mobile Admin Web Client
For detailed information about the minimum system requirements for each supported wireless device, see Installing the Mobile Admin Client on page 9
Using Mobile Admin with BlackBerry smartphones

This section provides information about how Mobile Admin works on your network with BlackBerry smartphones. Mobile Admin architecture with a BlackBerry Enterprise Server Figure 1-1 shows how Mobile Admin connects your wireless device to your network if you are using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server. The Mobile Admin Server is connected to the servers and computers that you want to manage with Mobile Admin. Information about these servers and computers is sent through the Mobile Admin Server to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server. The BlackBerry Enterprise Server encrypts the data with Triple Data Encryption Standard (TDES) or Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and sends it over the Internet and the wireless network to the BlackBerry smartphone. The BlackBerry smartphone decrypts the data so that it can be viewed using the Mobile Admin Client. Similarly, Mobile Admin Client commands from the BlackBerry smartphone are encrypted then sent over the wireless network and the Internet to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server. The BlackBerry Enterprise Server decrypts the commands and sends
2 Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide Mobile Admin v. 5.1
them to the Mobile Admin Server, which then further decrypts the commands if required, and then performs the requested actions. You can also configure Mobile Admin to connect with HyperText Transport Protocol Secured (HTTPS), which encrypts all data with Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol before it is transmitted between the Mobile Admin Server and the BlackBerry smartphones.
Figure 1-1 Mobile Admin architecture with a BlackBerry smartphone and a BlackBerry Enterprise Server
Internet
BlackBerry with Mobile Admin Client
Wireless Networks
Corporate C t Firewall
BlackBerry Enterprise Server
Mobile Admin Server
Servers and computers managed by Mobile Admin
TDES/AES
Note
Figure 1-1 shows the Mobile Admin Server and the BlackBerry Enterprise Server installed on separate computers. However, the Mobile Admin Server can be installed on the same computer as the BlackBerry Enterprise Server. Mobile Admin architecture without a BlackBerry Enterprise Server Figure 1-2 shows how Mobile Admin connects your wireless device to your network if you are not using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server. The Mobile Admin Server is connected to the servers and computers that you want to manage with Mobile Admin. If you configure Mobile Admin to connect to your network with HTTPS, then the Mobile Admin Server encrypts the data and sends it over the Internet and the wireless network to the BlackBerry smartphone. The BlackBerry smartphone decrypts the data so that it can be viewed using the Mobile Admin Client. Similarly, Mobile Admin Client commands from the BlackBerry smartphone are encrypted with HTTPS, and then sent over the wireless network and the Internet. The Mobile Admin Server decrypts the commands if required, and then performs the requested actions
Tip
If you are not using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server, it is strongly recommended that you configure Mobile Admin to use HTTPS.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Figure 1-2 Mobile Admin architecture with a BlackBerry smartphone without a BlackBerry Enterprise Server
Internet Smartphone with Mobile Admin Client Wireless Networks HTTPS/VPN Computer with Mobile Admin Client
TDES
/AES
BlackBerry Enterprise Server HTTPS/VPN
HTTP
S/VP
Corporate Firewall
Mobile bil Ad Admin i Server
Mobile Admin security with a BlackBerry There are two types of security available for Mobile Admin: Authentication includes a choice of Microsoft Windows user name and password, or Mobile Admin password, or LDAP password as an initial mandatory authentication; BlackBerry smartphone password (optional), and RSA SecurID or RADIUS authentication (optional) Encryption Triple Data Encryption Standard (TDES) or Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) if you are using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server, and HyperText Transport Protocol - Secured (HTTPS) (optional)
Mandatory authentication You can choose what kinds of authentication are required to
access Mobile Admin. If you select Windows authentication, then administrative access to servers is identical to the Windows user permission and authentication settings for your network. For example, if you are configured to have administrative access to specific servers or services in your network, you will only have administrative access to those servers and services in Mobile Admin. You must always provide your Windows network login name and password to login to Mobile Admin. The Mobile Admin Server can be configured to require a network login every time you open the Mobile Admin Client, or after a time-out interval that you specify.
BlackBerry smartphone password authentication The BlackBerry smartphone
password provides device-level authentication. When the smartphone password feature is enabled on your BlackBerry, you must enter a password before you can use the BlackBerry smartphone.
RSA SecurID authentication Mobile Admin has been officially approved as an RSA-
Certified application. This option requires you to log in using your SecurID token and your secret PIN before using Mobile Admin. For more information about using RSA SecurID Authentication, see www.rsasecurity.com.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Introduction to Mobile Admin Using Mobile Admin with Windows Mobile, Android and Apple devices
RADIUS authentication Mobile Admin supports RADIUS authentication, which means that Mobile Admin can act as a RADIUS client or RADIUS device for whatever type of RADIUS server and authentication system you are using, such as SafeWord. TDES/AES encryption All data sent between the BlackBerry Enterprise Server and the BlackBerry are encrypted using TDES or AES. The US Government has certified TDES and AES as compliant with Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS). Additionally, if a BlackBerry smartphone is lost, you can use the BlackBerry Enterprise Server or the Mobile Admin application on another device to kill it remotely, a process that disables and erases the Mobile Admin application. HTTPS encryption Mobile Admin offers the option of adding HTTPS encryption to all data sent between the Mobile Admin Server and Mobile Admin Clients. This option is highly recommended for users who decide to use Mobile Admin without a BlackBerry Enterprise Server. Note
For information about how to install Mobile Admin on a BlackBerry, see Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on a BlackBerry smartphone on page 9.
Using Mobile Admin with Windows Mobile, Android and Apple devices
This section provides information about how Mobile Admin works on your network with your Windows Mobile, Android and Apple wireless devices. Mobile Admin architecture Figure 1-3 shows how Mobile Admin connects your wireless device to your network. The Mobile Admin Server is connected to the servers and computers that you want to manage with Mobile Admin, preferably through a Virtual Private Network (VPN), which encrypts network data. If you configure Mobile Admin to use HTTPS, then the Mobile Admin Server encrypts the data and sends it over the Internet and the wireless network to the wireless device. The Mobile Admin Client decrypts the data on the wireless device so that it can be viewed. Similarly, Mobile Admin Client commands from the wireless device can be encrypted with HTTPS then sent over the wireless network and the Internet. The Mobile Admin Server decrypts the commands if required, and then performs the requested actions
Tip
If you are not using a VPN, it is strongly recommended that you configure Mobile Admin to use HTTPS.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Introduction to Mobile Admin Using Mobile Admin with Windows Mobile, Android and Apple devices
Figure 1-3 Mobile Admin architecture with Windows Mobile/Android/Apple wireless devices
Internet Smartphone with Mobile Admin Client Wireless Networks HTTPS/VPN Computer with Mobile Admin Client
TDES
/AES
BlackBerry Enterprise Server HTTPS/VPN
HTTP
S/VP
Corporate Firewall
Mobile bil Ad Admin i Server
Mobile Admin security with a Windows Mobile/Android/Apple wireless device There are two types of security available for Mobile Admin: Authentication Microsoft Windows user name and password (required), device password (optional), and RSA SecurID authentication (optional) Encryption HyperText Transport Protocol - Secured (HTTPS) (optional) and Virtual Private Network (VPN) encryption (optional)
Windows authentication Administrative access to servers is fully integrated with the Windows security settings for your network. If you are configured to have administrative access to specific servers or services in your network, you will only have administrative access to those servers and services in Mobile Admin. You must always provide your Windows network login name and password to log into Mobile Admin. The Mobile Admin Server can be configured to require a network login every time you open the Mobile Admin Client, or after a time-out interval that you specify. Device password authentication Most wireless devices and phones provide optional
device-level authentication. When the device password feature is enabled, you must enter a password before you can use the device and Mobile Admin.
RSA SecurID authentication Mobile Admin has been officially approved as an RSA-
Certified application. This option requires you to log in using your SecurID token and your secret PIN before using Mobile Admin. For more information about using RSA SecurID Authentication, see www.rsasecurity.com.
HTTPS encryption Mobile Admin offers the option of using HTTPS encryption for all data sent between the Mobile Admin Server and Mobile Admin Client. Tip
If you are not using a VPN, it is strongly recommended that you configure Mobile Admin to use HTTPS.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Introduction to Mobile Admin Using Mobile Admin with the Web Interface
VPN encryption You can use Mobile Admin by first connecting to your network through
a VPN, which encrypts and secures your network data. It is strongly recommended that you use a VPN if you are not connecting through a BlackBerry Enterprise Server.
Note
For information about how to install Mobile Admin on a Windows Mobile device, see Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Windows Mobile devices on page 13
Using Mobile Admin with the Web Interface

The Mobile Admin Web Interface is a web-based user interface of Mobile Admin; you can perform any Mobile Admin function on the Mobile Admin Web Interface that you can perform on your device.You can use the Mobile Admin Web Interface from any computer with an Internet connection and an Internet browser. Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox are the supported browsers.
Getting startedan overview

The administrator who installed the Mobile Admin Server software provides the location of the Mobile Admin Client software to the users who are planning to install it. For wireless installations, the administrator should provide the URL of the client software. For installations from the desktop, the administrator should provide the network location of the Mobile Admin Client software. To get started with the Mobile Admin Client, perform the following in order:
1 2 3 4
Install the Mobile Admin Client as described in Installing the Mobile Admin Client on page 9. Log in to Mobile Admin for the first time and enter the Mobile Admin Server settings, as described in Installing the Mobile Admin Client on page 9. Set up or optimize your device for use with Mobile Admin, as described in Installing the Mobile Admin Client on page 9. Start using Mobile Admin to manage your network.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Introduction to Mobile Admin Getting startedan overview
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Installing the Mobile Admin Client Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on a BlackBerry smartphone
Installing the Mobile Admin Client

This chapter provides information about how to install the Mobile Admin Client software on the following:
Note
BlackBerry smartphones page 9 Windows Mobile devices page 13 Android devices - page 15 Apple iPhone and iPod Touch - page 18
The Mobile Admin web client is accessible through a supported browser (Mozilla Firefox and Microsoft Internet Explorer) as part of general installation.
Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on a BlackBerry smartphone

This section provides instructions for installing, setting up, upgrading, and uninstalling the Mobile Admin Client software on a BlackBerry smartphone. Installing over-the-air You can install the client software either over-the-air, or using the BlackBerry Desktop Manager. If you are installing the software over-the-air, you must know the URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software. Installing using the BlackBerry Desktop Manager If you are installing the software using the BlackBerry Desktop Manager, you must: know the network location of the directory that contains the Mobile Admin Client software; and make sure that the operating system for your BlackBerry smartphone is installed on the desktop computer that you will be using to install the Mobile Admin Client software.
Minimum system requirements Make sure that the BlackBerry smartphone where you install the software meets the following requirements: BlackBerry smartphone with the version 4.2.1 operating system or higher and
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Note
at least 1MB of available memory
If you are using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server to connect to your network, the MDS Connection Service should have been enabled for your user account as part of the installation of the Mobile Admin Server. If the MDS Connection Service is not enabled, you will not be able to install or use the Mobile Admin Client. For more information about enabling the MDS Connection Service, refer to the Mobile Admin Server Installation and Configuration Guide.
To install the Mobile Admin Client over-the-air

1 2
Open the Internet browser application on your BlackBerry smartphone. Open the URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software. The default URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software is http://[ServerName]:4054, where [ServerName] is the name of the server where the Mobile Admin Server software has been installed, and where the number after the colon refers to the port number selected to be used by Mobile Admin. The Mobile Admin Client Installation screen appears.
Note
Record the displayed server settings: Mobile Admin Server the name of the network server where the Mobile Admin Server was installed Mobile Admin port the port number that the Mobile Admin Server will use to communicate with your device Connect using HTTPS indicates whether a check box with the same name (Connect using HTTPS) must be selected or cleared when you enter the server settings the first time you connect to the Mobile Admin Server The Mobile Admin Server detects your smartphone type, and presents that information. Please confirm these settings before continuing. Click Install the Mobile Admin Client for your smartphone The MobileAdmin.jad page appears. Click Download. A status bar shows the progress of the installation. When the installation is complete, a message appears and indicates that the installation was successful. Click OK.
4 5 6
To install the Mobile Admin Client using the Desktop Manager

1 2 3 4 5
Open the BlackBerry Desktop Manager application. Open the Application Loader. Follow the prompts in the Application Loader Wizard. On the Device Application Selection screen, click the Add... button. Browse to the directory containing the Mobile Admin Client files relevant for your handheld model and OS (the client files are on the server where the Mobile Admin Server was installed, as subfolders to: C:\Program Files\Rove\Mobile Admin\client\bb\desktop).
10
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
6 7 8
Select the MobileAdmin.alx file in the appropriate folder and click the Open button. Select the Mobile Admin check box. Click Next and complete the installation wizard.
To set up the Mobile Admin Client You only need to do this procedure once. The first time you use the Mobile Admin Client on your wireless device, you must enter the server settings that were displayed during the installation of the software. These settings include the host name or IP address of the computer where the Mobile Admin Server was installed, the port used to connect the BlackBerry Enterprise Server to the Mobile Admin Server, and the mode of connection (TCP/IP or MDS Connection Service). If you do not have the required server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network.
1 2
On the main screen of your wireless device, select the Mobile Admin icon. A welcome message appears. Type the server settings that you recorded from the Mobile Admin Client Installation screen, or that you received from your network administrator. If you are not using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server, the port you must enter is the one used by your gateway to connect to the Mobile Admin Server, and you must use TCP/IP. While it is highly recommended that you connect with HTTPS, you cannot successfully connect to the Mobile Admin Server with HTTPS unless the Mobile Admin Server has also been configured to use it. If you are using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server, it is highly recommended that you connect through the MDS Connection Service. (You can connect through TCP/IP, but if you do, your Mobile Admin data will not go through the BlackBerry Enterprise Server and may not be encrypted.) If you have any questions about the server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network. On the menu, select Save. A message appears: The application Mobile Admin has requested an http connection to [your default server]. This message will appear every time you log into Mobile Admin and every time you send a new Mobile Admin command during a sessionunless you select a check box in the
Note
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
11
Dont ask this again for field. The default server is the computer where the Mobile Admin
Server has been installed. Do one of the following:

If Then
you want to allow this and all future connections to the Mobile Admin Server from your wireless device (recommended) the Mobile Admin Server will be moved to another computer in the near future and you do not want to be asked to allow the connection when the server is moved you want to be asked to confirm the http connection the next time you connect to the Mobile Admin Server and every time you send a new Mobile Admin command during a session
5
select the http connections to Server Name check box.
select the all http connections check box.
go to step 5.
Click Allow Connection. The Mobile Admin Client connects to the Mobile Admin Server. If you have entered the server settings incorrectly, an error message will appear. Note the contents of the error message and click OK to return to the Mobile Admin welcome screen. If Mobile Admin can detect the cause of the error, the error message will provide specific instructions to change or correct your server settings. If Mobile Admin cannot detect the cause of the error, review your server settings carefully, make any required corrections, and try to connect again.
Help
To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client

1 2
Follow the procedure To install the Mobile Admin Client using the Desktop Manager on page 10 or To install the Mobile Admin Client over-the-air on page 10. Reboot your wireless device.
To uninstall the Mobile Admin Client This procedure is compatible with many BlackBerry smartphones. If it is not compatible with your BlackBerry smartphone, refer to the documentation that came with your device, and follow the procedure for uninstalling, deleting, or removing software.
1 2 3 4 5
On the main screen of your wireless device, select the Options icon. Select Applications. Scroll down to Mobile Admin. On the menu, click Delete. A dialog box appears and confirms that you want to delete Mobile Admin. Click Delete. A message appears and confirms that Mobile Admin was successfully deleted.
12
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Installing the Mobile Admin Client Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Windows Mobile devices
Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Windows Mobile devices

This section provides instructions for installing, setting up, upgrading, and uninstalling the Mobile Admin Client software on Windows Mobile wireless devices. You can install the client software either wirelessly or from your desktop. About installing the software wirelessly If you are installing the software wirelessly, you must know the URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software. About installing the software from the desktop If you are installing the software from your desktop, you must know the network location of the directory that contains the Mobile Admin Client software. Minimum system requirements for Windows Mobile devices The Windows Mobile wireless device upon which you install the software must meet the following requirements: and
Notes
Windows Mobile 6 or higher (Windows Mobile 6.1 Pro is recommended but not required) a VPN client (strongly recommended but not required)
A VPN client is provided by default on all Windows Mobile Professional devices.
To install the Mobile Admin Client wirelessly

1 2
Open the web browser on your Windows Mobile wireless device. Open the URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software. The default URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software is http://[ServerName]:4054, where [ServerName] is the name of the server where the Mobile Admin Server software has been installed, and where the number after the colon refers to the port number selected to be used by Mobile Admin. The Mobile Admin Client Installation screen appears.
Note
Record the displayed server settings: Mobile Admin Server the name of the network server where the Mobile Admin Server was installed Mobile Admin port the port number that the Mobile Admin Server will use to communicate with your wireless device Connect using HTTPS indicates whether a check box with the same name (Connect using HTTPS) must be selected or cleared when you enter the server settings the first time you connect to the Mobile Admin Server Click the link Install the Mobile Admin Client. The Download screen appears and confirms that you want to download the application file and to confirm the location where the application file will be stored. Change the location for the file if required.
Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide 13
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Installing the Mobile Admin Client Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Windows Mobile devices
6 7
On the Download screen, select the Open file after download check box. Click Yes. A status bar shows the progress of the installation and closes when the installation is complete. Click Start, then Programs, and check if the Mobile Admin icon appears in the list to make sure that the installation was successful.
To install the Mobile Admin Client from the desktop

1
On your desktop, browse to the directory containing the Mobile Admin Client file called MobileAdminWindowsMobile.msi. (The client files are located on the server where the Mobile Admin Server was installed: C:\Program Files\Rove\Mobile Admin\client\WindowsMobile\MobileAdminWindowsMobile.msi.) Double-click the file MobileAdminWindowsMobile.msi. The Rove Mobile Admin Installation Wizard opens. Follow the Installation Wizard prompts to install Mobile Admin. The Choose Install Location window appears. On the Windows Mobile device, click Start and select Programs. Check that the Rove Mobile Admin icon appears in the list of available programs.
2 3 4 5
To set up the Mobile Admin Client The first time you use the Mobile Admin Client on your Windows Mobile device, you must enter the server settings that were displayed during the installation of the software. These settings include the host name or IP address of the computer where the Mobile Admin Server was installed, the port used to connect to the Mobile Admin Server, and whether or not you want to connect using HTTPS. If you do not have the required server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network.
Tip
It is strongly recommended that you connect to your network through a VPN before you start this procedure.
1 2 3
From your list of available programs, scroll to the Mobile Admin icon and select it. A welcome message appears. Type the server settings that you recorded from the Mobile Admin Client Installation screen, or that you received from your network administrator. If required, select the Connect using HTTPS check box. While it is highly recommended that you connect with HTTPS, you cannot successfully connect to the Mobile Admin Server with HTTPS unless the Mobile Admin Server has also been configured to use it. If you have any questions about the server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network. Save the settings. The device saves the settings and attempts to connect to the Mobile Admin Server. A message appears and asks if you want to allow the Mobile Admin Client application to connect to the network.
Note
14
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Installing the Mobile Admin Client Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Android devices
Click Yes. The Mobile Admin Client connects to the Mobile Admin Server. If you have entered the server settings incorrectly, an error message will appear. Note the contents of the error message and close it to return to the Mobile Admin welcome screen. If Mobile Admin can detect the cause of the error, the error message will provide specific instructions to change or correct your server settings. If Mobile Admin cannot detect the cause of the error, review your server settings carefully, make any required corrections, and try to connect again.
Help
To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client Follow the procedure To install the Mobile Admin Client wirelessly on page 13 or To install the Mobile Admin Client from the desktop on page 14.
To uninstall Mobile Admin Client

1 2 3 4 5
Click Start, then Settings. The Settings window appears. On the System tab, select Remove Programs. The Remove Programs window appears. Select Mobile Admin. Click Remove. A message appears and asks if you want to delete the Mobile Admin application. Click Yes.
Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Android devices

This section provides instructions for installing, setting up, upgrading, and uninstalling the Mobile Admin Client software on Android wireless devices. You can install the client software either wirelessly or from your desktop. About installing the software wirelessly If you are installing the software wirelessly, you must know the URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software. About installing the software from the desktop If you are installing the software from your desktop, you must know the network location of the directory that contains the Mobile Admin Client software. Minimum system requirements for Android devices The Android wireless device upon which you install the software must meet the following requirements: Android v1.5 and higher and
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
15
a VPN client (strongly recommended but not required)
To install the Mobile Admin Client wirelessly

1 2
Open the web browser on your Android wireless device. Open the URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software. The default URL for the location of the Mobile Admin Client software is http://[ServerName]:4054, where [ServerName] is the name of the server where the Mobile Admin Server software has been installed, and where the number after the colon refers to the port number selected to be used by Mobile Admin. The Mobile Admin Client Installation page appears.
Note
Record the displayed server settings: Mobile Admin Server the name of the network server where the Mobile Admin Server was installed Mobile Admin port the port number that the Mobile Admin Server will use to communicate with your wireless device Connect using HTTPS indicates whether a check box with the same name (Connect using HTTPS) must be selected or cleared when you enter the server settings the first time you connect to the Mobile Admin Server Click the link Install the Mobile Admin Client. The Download screen appears, showing download progress Click the Mobile Admin Client download in the Download screen. The Install Confirmation screen appears. Click the Install button to continue. The Install Progress screen appears When the installation is complete, press the Done button to exit, or press Open to start the Rove Mobile Admin Client application.
4 5 6 7
To install the Mobile Admin Client through the Android Market

1 2 3 4 5 6
Open the Market application on your device Touch the Search item in the first screen shown Search for Rove Mobile Admin Client Select Rove Mobile Admin Client from the list of search results Press the Install button When installation completes, verify that the Mobile Admin application is visible in your device application list.
To set up the Mobile Admin Client The first time you use the Mobile Admin Client on your Android device, you must enter the server settings that were displayed during the installation of the software. These settings include the host name or IP address of the computer where the Mobile Admin Server was installed, the port used to connect to the Mobile Admin Server, and whether or not you want to connect using HTTPS.
16
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
If you do not have the required server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network.
Tip
1 2 3
From your list of available programs, scroll to the Mobile Admin icon and click it. A welcome message appears. Type the server settings that you recorded from the Mobile Admin Client Installation screen, or that you received from your network administrator. If required, select the Connect using HTTPS check box. While it is highly recommended that you connect with HTTPS, you cannot successfully connect to the Mobile Admin Server with HTTPS unless the Mobile Admin Server has also been configured to use it. If you have any questions about the server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network. Save the settings. The device saves the settings and attempts to connect to the Mobile Admin Server. Click Yes. The Mobile Admin Client connects to the Mobile Admin Server. If you have entered the server settings incorrectly, an error message will appear. Note the contents of the error message and close it to return to the Mobile Admin welcome screen. If Mobile Admin can detect the cause of the error, the error message will provide specific instructions to change or correct your server settings. If Mobile Admin cannot detect the cause of the error, review your server settings carefully, make any required corrections, and try to connect again.
Note
4 5
Help
To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client Follow the procedure Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Android devices on page 15

1 2 3 4 5 6
From the Application list, click Settings. The Settings screen appears. Click Applications. Click Manage Applications. Scroll down until Mobile Admin appears on the list. Click the Mobile Admin icon. The Application info screen appears. Click Uninstall. A message appears and asks if you want to uninstall the Mobile Admin application. Click OK. The uninstall progress screen appears..
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
17
Installing the Mobile Admin Client Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Apple iPhone/iPod Touch devices
Installing the Mobile Admin Client software on Apple iPhone/iPod Touch devices
This section provides instructions for installing, setting up, upgrading, and uninstalling the Mobile Admin Client software on Apple iPhone or iPod Touch wireless devices. The Mobile Admin Client must be installed through Apples App Store. Minimum system requirements for Apple iPhone/iPod Touch The Apple wireless device upon which you install the software must meet the following requirements: OS v3.0 or higher and
Notes
a VPN client (strongly recommended but not required)
A VPN client is provided by default on all iPhone/iPod Touch devices.
To install the Mobile Admin Client through the Apple App Store
1 2 3 4 5 6
Open the App Store application on your device Touch the Search button at the bottom Select the Rove Mobile Admin Client application from the list Click the Free button to the right of the title to begin installation Enter your iTunes username and password when prompted When installation completes, verify that the Mobile Admin application is visible in your device application list.
To set up the Mobile Admin Client The first time you use the Mobile Admin Client on your iPhone or iPod Touch device, you must enter connection information for your Mobile Admin Server. This information includes the host name or IP address of the computer where the Mobile Admin Server was installed, the port used to connect to the Mobile Admin Server, and whether or not you want to connect using HTTPS. If you do not have the required server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network.
Tip
1 2
Click the Mobile Admin icon on your home screen. A welcome message appears. When asked, please enter the Mobile Admin Server information.
18
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
If required, select Connect using HTTPS. While it is highly recommended that you connect with HTTPS, you cannot successfully connect to the Mobile Admin Server with HTTPS unless the Mobile Admin Server has also been configured to use it. If you have any questions about the server settings, contact the administrator who installed and configured the Mobile Admin Server on your network. Press Connect. The device saves the settings and attempts to connect to the Mobile Admin Server.
Note
Help
If you have entered the server settings incorrectly, an error message will appear. Note the contents of the error message and close it to return to the Mobile Admin welcome screen. If Mobile Admin can detect the cause of the error, the error message will provide specific instructions to change or correct your server settings. If Mobile Admin cannot detect the cause of the error, review your server settings carefully, make any required corrections, and try to connect again.
To upgrade the Mobile Admin Client The App Store application will notify you when Rove posts updates to the Mobile Admin Client application.

1 2 3 4
Touch and hold the Mobile Admin Client application icon. The icons on the screen begin to shake. Touch the X now shown on the top left-hand corner of the application icon. The application deletion confirmation dialog appears. Select Delete. Please rate the application when prompted.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
19
20
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Getting started with Mobile Admin Using the Mobile Admin Client on a BlackBerry smartphone
Getting started with Mobile Admin

This chapter provides information about general navigation for Mobile Admin on BlackBerry smartphones, Windows Mobile devices, Android devices, and the Web Interface. This chapter also provides information about logging into and out of Mobile Admin, managing server lists and shortcuts, and changing display options.
Tip
For detailed instructions about how to use your wireless device, refer to the user documentation provided with the device.
Using the Mobile Admin Client on a BlackBerry smartphone

To access the menu Press the Menu button.
To select a menu item

1 2 3
Press the Menu button to display the menu. Roll the trackball/wheel to scroll to the menu item you want to select, or on touch-enabled devices, drag your finger over the menu item you want to select. Press the trackball/wheel to select the item, or on touch-enabled devices, press the highlighted item to select it.
To go back to the previous screen Press the Escape button, or select Back on the menu.
To refresh the screen Refresh the screen to reload the information displayed on the screen; for example, to update a list of processes running on a computer. It is recommended that you refresh the screen when information may have been changed by some method other than through Mobile Admin. On the menu, select Refresh.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
21
Getting started with Mobile Admin Using the Mobile Admin Client on a Windows Mobile device
Using the Mobile Admin Client on a Windows Mobile device

To access the menu Select Menu in the bottom right corner of the screen.

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the menu on page 22. Select the menu item.
To go back to the previous screen On the menu, select Back.
To refresh the screen Refresh the screen to reload the information displayed on the screen; for example, to update a list of processes running on a computer. It is recommended that you refresh the screen when information may have been changed by some method other than through Mobile Admin. On the menu, select Refresh.
Using the Mobile Admin Client on an Android device

To access the menu Press the Menu button on the device.

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the menu on page 22. Press or select the menu item.
To go back to the previous screen Press the Back button on the device.
To refresh the screen Refresh the screen to reload the information displayed on the screen; for example, to update a list of processes running on a computer. It is recommended that you refresh the screen when information may have been changed by some method other than through Mobile Admin. On the menu, click Refresh.
22
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Getting started with Mobile Admin Using the Mobile Admin Client on an Apple iPhone/iPod Touch device
Using the Mobile Admin Client on an Apple iPhone/iPod Touch device

To access the menu Touch the button labelled Menu in the bottom left corner of the screen.

1
On the menu, touch the desired menu item.
To go back to the previous screen Touch the button labelled with the title of the previous screen in the top right-hand corner of the screen.
To refresh the screen Refresh the screen to reload the information displayed on the screen; for example, to update a list of processes running on a computer. It is recommended that you refresh the screen when information may have been changed by some method other than through Mobile Admin. On the menu, touch Refresh.
Using Mobile Admin on the Web Interface

The Mobile Admin Web Interface is a web-based user interface of Mobile Admin; you can perform any Mobile Admin function on the Mobile Admin Web Interface that you can perform on your device. You can use the Mobile Admin Web Interface from any computer with an Internet connection and an Internet browser. Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox are the supported browsers. The Mobile Admin Web Interface is the recommended client to use for configuring Mobile Admin.
Note
Using Internet Explorer 6 to view the Web Interface can cause some display problems.
To access the Mobile Admin Web Interface

1 2
On any computer with an Internet connection, open the Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox browser. Open the URL: http://[ServerName]:4054. If you are using HTTPS to connect, use the URL https://[ServerName]:4055. For example, if the name of your Mobile Admin Server computer is Fred and you are using HTTPS to connect, open the URL https://fred:4055. Click Web Interface. The Rove Mobile Admin Web page opens.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
23
Getting started with Mobile Admin Logging in and logging out
4 5
Enter your Windows information in the User name: and Password: text fields, and select your domain from the Log on to: drop-down menu. Click Login. The Mobile Admin home page opens. For information about how to navigate the Mobile Admin home screen, see Navigating the Mobile Admin home screen on page 25.
Note
Logging in and logging out

Depending on how security for Mobile Admin has been configured, you can have up to three levels of authentication that can be required, in this order: device password authentication (optional) RSA SecurID (optional) or RADIUS authentication (optional) Windows user name and password (required)
For more information about these different types of authentication, see Mobile Admin security with a BlackBerry on page 4 or Mobile Admin security with a Windows Mobile/Android/Apple wireless device on page 6. To log in to Mobile Admin
1
Select the Mobile Admin icon on your device. The Mobile Admin screen appears. If you have RSA SecurID, you must login using your PIN and the code from your token. When you have successfully logged into RSA SecurID, the Mobile Admin screen appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
Note
you want to log in to the default domain you want to save the user name and password you want to log into another domain or computer
3 4
Enter credentials in the User name and Password fields. Select the Save password check box. In the Log on to field, select another domain or computer to log into from the drop-down menu, then enter a valid User name and Password.
On the menu, click Login. A message appears indicating when you are logged into the specified server. Click OK. The Mobile Admin home screen appears. For information about how to navigate the Mobile Admin home screen, see Navigating the Mobile Admin home screen on page 25.
Note
24
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Getting started with Mobile Admin Navigating the Mobile Admin home screen
To change which server to log into, or change server settings Use this procedure to change which server to log into when you start Mobile Admin. Log out of Mobile Admin before you perform this procedure.
1 2 3 4 5
Select the Mobile Admin icon. The Mobile Admin page opens. On the menu, click Switch Server. A welcome message appears. Enter the server settings for the server you would like to log onto. On the menu, click Save. The Mobile Admin screen appears. Log in to Mobile Admin.
To log out of Mobile Admin Log out of Mobile Admin when you are finished a session, or if you want to log in as a different user. On the menu, click Logout.
To close the Mobile Admin Client application If you close Mobile Admin without logging out, the next time you open the application, you will not have to log in again, unless the security settings on the Mobile Admin Server require that you log in every time you open the Mobile Admin Client, or if a security timeout period has elapsed. On the menu, click Close.
Navigating the Mobile Admin home screen

When you log in to Mobile Admin, the home screen is displayed.
Note
To log in to Mobile Admin, see Logging in and logging out on page 24. The Mobile Admin home screen is divided into four sections:
Manage Services Manage Servers Shortcuts
Note
If you have administrator privileges, your home screen contains a Configuration menu item. For more information on Mobile Admin configuration, see Chapter 3: Configuring Mobile Admin in the Mobile Admin Server: Installation and Configuration Guide. You may return to the home screen at any time. On the menu, click Home.
Note
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
25
Getting started with Mobile Admin Manage Services
Manage Services
The Manage Services screen is where specific services can be managed in Mobile Admin. When you select Manage Services, a list of all services detected by Mobile Admin are shown.
Note
All procedures in this section assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and have selected Manage Services from the Mobile Admin home screen.
To add a service to your Manage Services list

1 2
On the list or menu, click Add Service. A list of all services that can be managed by Mobile Admin appears. On the list of supported services, click the service that you wish to add to the Manage Services list. The Add Service screen appears. In the Hostname or IP text field, enter the hostname or IP address of the host where the service resides. In the Username and Password text fields, enter your credentials for that service. There are also additional fields for configuration information for that service to direct Mobile Admin to the appropriate port or URL. When all required information is entered, click Add. Mobile Admin adds the service to the Manage Services list, and automatically adds the server to the Manage Servers list. It is possible to add the same service to the list, but for different servers. To add an additional service from a different server, follow steps 1 and 2 above, but click Add Other Server to show the Add Service screen.
Note
To remove a service from your Manage Services list

1
Scroll to the service you want to remove, and on the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected service from the list. Click OK. Mobile Admin displays a message confirming that the service was removed. Removing a service from this list has no impact on your Manage Servers list.
Note
To manage a service
1
Select the service you want to manage, then click Select on the menu. Mobile Admin detects what kind of server you have selected, what services are available on that server, and displays icons for appropriate administration tasks. For detailed information about performing specific types of administrative tasks, refer to the appropriate chapter later in this guide.
Note
26
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Getting started with Mobile Admin Manage Servers
To sort the Manage Services list by Host By default, the Manage Services list is sorted by service name. For convenience, it is possible to sort the list of services by host.
1 2
On the menu, click Sort by Host. Mobile Admin sorts the Manage Services list by host. To toggle back to sorting by service name, click Sort by Service on the menu.
Manage Servers
The Manage Servers section is where your servers are managed in Mobile Admin. When you select Manage Servers, a list of all servers for which you have been listed as a user is displayed.
Note
All procedures in this section assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and have selected Manage Servers from the Mobile Admin home screen.
To add a server to your server list

1 2
On the Manage Servers list, click Add Server. In the Hostname or IP text field, enter the hostname or IP address of the server you want to add. In the optional Username and Password text fields, enter your credentials for that server if required. As well, by clicking Advanced Options... in the menu or Actions pane, additional configuration information for that server can be entered for the following services: Telnet Port: If you wish to access Telnet on this server, please enter the port that the Telnet service is listening on. SSH Port: If you wish to access SSH on this server, please enter the port that the SSH service is listening on. VNC Port: If you wish to access VNC on this server, please enter the port that the VNC service is listening on. RDP Port: If you wish to access RDP on this server, please enter the port that the RDP service is listening on. Remedy AR Server Port: If you wish to access Remedy Service Desk on this server, please enter the port that the Remedy AR Server is listening on. BAS Port: If you wish to manage BES 5 on this server, please enter the port that the BlackBerry Administration Service (BAS) is listening on. Nagios Web Console Address: If the address of your Nagios Web Console is not in the format http://[nagioshostname]/nagios, you must set the address here. Credential and server configuration information can be modified later. On the menu, click Add.
Note
3
To remove a server from your server list

1
Scroll to the server you want to remove, and on the menu, click Remove.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
27
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected server from the list.
2
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message confirming that the server was removed.
To add a server or servers to your server list by browsing the network

1 2
On the Manage Servers list, click Browse Network. A list of your networks appears. Select the network in which the server/s you are looking add is/are located, and if applicable, select the domain in which the server is located. You may also browse through your Active Directory tree by choosing Browse Active Directory. On the menu, select one or more servers and select Add To Servers.
The servers now appear in your Manage Servers list. To manage a server
1
Scroll on to the server you want to manage, then click Select on the menu. When connecting to servers for the first time, you may notice increased loading times. This is caused by the Mobile Admin Server detecting the services running on that server. Once this information has been gathered, these delays will no longer occur. Mobile Admin detects what kind of server you have selected, what services are available on that server, and displays icons for appropriate administration tasks.
Note
Note
You will see icons relevant to what you can manage on the selected server. For example, the Active Directory icon will only appear on domain controllers and the Local Users and Groups icon will only appear on member servers. To perform an administrative task, select one of the items on this list. Each task may have several screens and/or task icons associated with it. For detailed information about performing specific types of administrative tasks, refer to the appropriate chapter in this guide. Organizing servers You can group servers into folders and subfolders so that they are easier to manage.
Note
To sort the Manage Servers list by Service By default, the Manage Servers list is sorted by host name. For convenience, it is possible to sort the list of servers based on which services can be managed on them.
1
On the menu, click Sort by Service. Mobile Admin sorts the Manage Servers list by service.
28
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To toggle back to sorting by host name, click Sort by Host on the menu. To create a server folder
1 2 3
On the menu, select New Folder. The Create New Folder page opens. In the Folder name field, enter a name for the folder, then select Create. The Created new Folder foldername page opens. Select OK. The Mobile Admin page opens displaying your folders and servers.
To create a server sub-folder

1 2 3 4
Select the folder for which you want to create a subfolder. The foldername page opens. On the menu, select New Folder. The Create New Folder page opens. In the Folder name field, enter a name for the folder, then select Create. The Created new Folder foldername page opens. Select OK. The Mobile Admin page opens displaying your folders and servers.
To add a server to a folder/sub-folder

1 2 3 4
Select the folder into which you want to add a server. The foldername page opens. On the menu, select Add Server. The Add Server page opens. In the Hostname or IP field, enter the name of the server you want to add, then select Add. The Added server servername page opens. Select OK. The foldername page opens displaying the servers within it. Credentials The Windows credentials that you used to authenticate to Mobile Admin are the default credentials used to manage services on the Mobile Admin Server, and to connect to servers from Mobile Admin. You can modify the credentials that Mobile Admin uses for an individual server, or apply credentials to a group of servers. Applying credentials gives the selected servers identical information; if you manage multiple servers on multiple domains, you may want to apply the same credentials to each server in the domain to enable easier.
To modify credentials for an individual server

Note
You can only modify credentials for a server into which you are not currently authenticated. Select the server for which you want to change credentials.
1
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The Manage servername page opens.

2 3 4 5 6
On the menu, select Credentials. The Credentials page opens. In the Connect as field, enter the username you would like to use in the format domain\username. In the Password field, enter the password for the username. On the menu, select Save. The Credentials have been saved dialog box appears. Click OK. Mobile Admin saves the new credentials. In every subsequent Mobile Admin session, Mobile Admin will use these new credentials for the server you modified. A server will not inherit credentials if it is added to the server list after credentials have been applied.
Note
To apply credentials to a group of servers

Note
1
You can only apply credentials to a server into which you are not currently authenticated. Select all the servers for which you want to apply credentials. The credentials specified will be applied to all selected servers, as well as all servers contained in any folders you have selected. On the menu, select Apply Credentials. The Apply Credentials page opens. In the Connect as field, enter the username you would like to use in the format domain\username. In the Password field, enter the password for the username. On the menu, select Save. The Credentials have been saved dialog box appears. Click OK. Mobile Admin saves the new credentials. In every subsequent Mobile Admin session, Mobile Admin will use these new credentials for the server you modified. A server will not inherit credentials if it is added to the server list after credentials have been applied.
Note
2 3 4 5 6
Note
Global Folders (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Global Folders are folders that are created by the administrator of Mobile Admin. This feature is used to pre-populate folders for certain groups of users for convenience. These Global Folders will appear in the Manage Servers view.
30
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Getting started with Mobile Admin Shortcuts
To enter a global folder Scroll to the folder you want to manage and select the folder to enter. Servers shown within the folder can be interacted with just like any other server shown in the Manage Servers view. Unless you have administrator privileges, you cannot add or remove folders/servers from a global folder.
Note
Shortcuts
The Shortcuts section is where shortcuts are managed in Mobile Admin. Shortcuts work much like web browser bookmarks, allowing you to catalog and access specific pages within Mobile Admin. When you select Shortcuts, a list of all shortcuts you have created is displayed.
Note
All procedures in this section assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin.
To create a shortcut
1
Navigate to the page to which you want to create a shortcut. You cannot create a shortcut to a page on which data can change. Instead, create a shortcut to the page immediately preceding. On the menu, select Create shortcut... The Create Shortcut page opens. A default name for the shortcut is displayed in the Name field; you can rename the shortcut to a different unique identifier. Select Save. The Saved Shortcut page opens. Select OK. The shortcut is now listed in the Shortcuts page.
Note
2 3 4 5
To access a shortcut
1 2
From the Mobile Admin home screen, select Shortcuts The Shortcuts screen opens. Select the shortcut you want to access. The target page opens.
To edit a shortcut
1 2
From the Mobile Admin home screen, select Shortcuts. Perform one of the following: a On your wireless device, scroll to the shortcut you want to edit, then select Edit on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Getting started with Mobile Admin Setting the Default Screen
On the Web Interface, select the radio button of the shortcut you want to edit, and select Edit on the menu. The shortcut name page opens.
b 3 4 5
In the Name field enter a new name for your shortcut. Select Save. The Saved Shortcut page opens. Select OK. The Shortcuts page opens displaying your updated list of shortcuts.
To delete a shortcut
1 2
From the Mobile Admin home screen, select Shortcuts. Perform one of the following: a On your wireless device, scroll to the shortcut you want to delete, then select Delete on the menu. b On the Web Interface, enable the radio button of the shortcut you want to delete, and select Delete on the menu. A dialog box appears to confirm that you want to delete the shortcut.
c Select OK/Yes. The Deleted Shortcut page opens.
Select OK. The Shortcuts page opens displaying your updated list of shortcuts.
Setting the Default Screen

When Mobile Admin is first installed, the first screen that appears when a user starts up the Mobile Admin Client and logs into a server is the Mobile Admin home screen. This first screen that is seen after logging into the Mobile Admin Server is known as the Mobile Admin default screen, and it is configurable. This feature is useful if you find yourself managing your servers primarily through one particular method in Mobile Admin. For example, your duties may primarily involve troubleshooting hosts. In this case, setting the default to the Manage Servers screen will allow you to more quickly connect to arbitrary hosts for diagnosing and troubleshooting. To set the default screen
1
In the screen that you wish to set as the default screen, click Set Current Page as Default. The default screen is set to the current screen The screens that can be set as the default are: Home Screen Manage Services Screen Manage Servers Screen Shortcuts Screen
The next time you enter Mobile Admin, the first screen you will see is the screen selected as the default in step 1.
32
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Using the command prompt
Managing Microsoft Windows

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Windows computers and servers. For information about how to manage specific Microsoft server types and products, see the following sections: Managing Microsoft Active Directory on page 73 Managing Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) on page 83 Managing Microsoft Internet Information Services (Mobile Admin Professional Only) on page 133 Managing Microsoft DHCP on page 139 Managing Microsoft DNS on page 145 Managing Microsoft Cluster Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) on page 151
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server to manage from your server list.
Using the command prompt

You can use the command prompt function in Mobile Admin to run MS-DOS commands on the server you have selected.
Note
You cannot run interactive programs in Mobile Admin from the command prompt.
To use the command prompt

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, select Command Prompt. The Command Prompt screen appears. Type an MS-DOS command, then click Send on the menu. To send symbols that are not available on the keyboard of your wireless device, click Show Symbols on the menu when your cursor is in the text field. To refresh the screen, click Refresh on the menu.
Note
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
33
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Using Windows PowerShell
Using Windows PowerShell

You can use the Windows PowerShell function in Mobile Admin to run certain Windows PowerShell commands on the server you have selected.
Note
You cannot run interactive programs in Mobile Admin from Windows PowerShell.
To use Windows PowerShell

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, select the Windows PowerShell icon. The Windows PowerShell on server name page opens. Enter a Windows PowerShell command, then select Send on the menu.
Using dial-up connections

You can use existing dial-up connections with Mobile Admin.
Note
You can only manage dial-up connections on the server where the Mobile Admin Server is installed.
To use a dial-up connection

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Dial-Up Connections icon. The Dial-Up Connections screen appears. Scroll to the dial-up connection that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The Connect screen for the selected dial-up connection appears. Complete the following fields as required: Username type the user name required for this connection Password type the password required for this connection Domain type the domain for this connection On the menu, click Connect. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the connection has been made.
2 3
Using the Event Viewer

You can use the Event Log Viewer in Mobile Admin to view and clear event logs. To view event logs
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Event Log Viewer icon.
34
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Managing drives, folders and files with File Explorer
A list of event logs appears, including Application, Security, and System.

2 3
Click the type of event you want to view. Mobile Admin displays the selected event log. Click one of the following time frames for the event: Last hour Last 12 hours Last 24 hours Last week Last month The list of event logs for the specified time frame appears.
To clear an event log

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view event logs. On the menu, click Clear events. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm if you want to clear the selected event log. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the event log has been cleared.
Managing drives, folders and files with File Explorer

You can use the File Explorer in Mobile Admin to manage drives, folders, and files in your network. To view drive properties and disk space usage
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the File Explorer icon. A list of available drives for the computer you have selected appears. Scroll to the drive for which you want to view properties. On the menu, click Drive Properties. The properties of the drive are displayed.
2 3
To browse folders
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the File Explorer icon. A list of available drives for the computer you have selected appears. Select a drive to browse. To select a drive, scroll to the drive and click Select on the menu. Scroll to the folder you want to open. To open a folder, click Select on the menu.
2 3
To create a new folder

1
Follow the procedure To browse folders and browse to the location where you want to create a new folder.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Managing drives, folders and files with File Explorer
2 3
On the menu, click New Folder. The New Folder screen appears. In the Name field, type a name for the new folder. The Location field displays where the folder will be created and cannot be modified. On the menu, click Create Folder. Mobile Admin performs the action and then displays a message to confirm that the folder has been created.
Note
4
To delete a folder
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To browse folders and browse to the folder that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected folder. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the folder has been deleted.
To view or change folder permissions

1 2
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the folder for which you want to view or edit permissions. On the menu, click Security. The Access Control Settings screen appears, and displays a list of users and groups who have permissions for the selected folder. Click the user or group whose permissions you would like to view or change. The Permission Entry screen for that user or group and for that folder appears. To change folder permissions for the selected user or group, select or clear the check boxes for each type of permission as required. To select or clear a check box, scroll to the permission, and then click Change Option on the menu. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new permissions were saved.
3 4
To add a trustee to a folder

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the folder to which you want to add a trustee. On the menu, click Security. The Access Control Settings screen appears. On the menu, click Add. The Add permissions screen appears. Complete the following fields: Type of security entry select Allow or Deny from the drop-down menu Name type the name of the user or group that you want to add as a trustee for the folder
36
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
From Location select the domain or the computer where the user or group is from
On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user or group has been added as a trustee. If there is more than one match for the name entered, Mobile Admin displays a list so you can select a name. Do one of the following:
If Then
the user or group was added as a trustee Mobile Admin found more than one user or group name that matched the name you typed To remove a trustee from a folder
1 2 3 4
Close the message window. scroll to the name of the user or group that you want to add. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user or group has been added as a trustee.
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the folder from which you want to remove a trustee. On the menu, click Security. The Access Control Settings screen appears. Select the user or group who you would like to remove. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected user or group as a permission entry. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user or group was removed.
To delete a file
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the folder that contains the file you want to delete. Scroll to the file that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected file. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the file was deleted.
To view file properties

1 2
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file for which you want to view properties. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties.
To FTP a file to a server

1
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file that you want to send to a server using File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
2 3 4
On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click FTP File. Mobile Admin displays the FTP File screen. Complete the following fields: Hostname type the hostname of the server you are FTPing the file to Port Mobile Admin displays the default FTP port, and you can enter a different port number if required Username type the username for the server you are FTPing the file to Password type the password for the server you are FTPing the file to FTP Transfer Type select either Binary or ASCII from the drop-down menu FTP Connection Type select either Active or Pasv (passive) from the drop-down menu Destination Folder type the location of the destination folder on the FTP server On the menu, click Send. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the file was sent.
To email a file
Note
To email files, SMTP must be configured correctly for the Mobile Admin Server. For more information, see the Mobile Admin Server Installation and Configuration Guide. Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file that you want to e-mail. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click E-mail File. The Compose E-mail screen appears. The Subject and Attachment fields are by default the name of the file you are e-mailing. Complete the following fields: From type your email address To type the address to which you want to email the file Body type the text you would like to send with the message On the menu, click Send. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the email was sent.
1 2 3
To move a file
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file that you want to move. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click Move File. The Move File screen appears.
38
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
4 5
In the Location field, type the full path name of the new location that you want to move the file to. On the menu, click Move File. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the file was moved.
To copy a file
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file that you want to copy. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click Copy File. The Copy File screen appears. In the Location field, type the full path name of the new location that you want to copy the file to. On the menu, click Copy File. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the file was copied.
To view an image file

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the image file that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click View. Mobile Admin displays the image.
To view or edit a text file

Note
Unicode file encoding is fully supported. However, for files that are not Unicode, Mobile Admin assumes the files are encoded with the current default system encoding type and uses that type when saving the files; this could result in a change in the encoding type.
Your device must provide the appropriate support for the language chosen.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the text file that you want to view or edit and save. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click Edit. Mobile Admin displays the text file. To edit the text file, type your changes on the screen. To enter special symbols, click Show Symbols on the menu. To save your changes to the file, click Save on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the file was saved. To view or change file permissions
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file for which you want to view or edit permissions. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click Security. The Access Control Settings screen appears, and displays a list of users and groups who have permissions for the selected file. Scroll to the user or group whose permissions you would like to view or change. On the menu, click Select. The Permission Entry screen for that user or group and for that file appears. To change folder permissions for the selected user or group, select or clear the check boxes for each type of permission as required. To select or clear a check box, scroll to the permission, and then click Change Option on the menu. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new permissions were saved.
To add a trustee to a file

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file to which you want to add a trustee. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties. On the menu, click Security. The Access Control Settings screen appears. On the menu, click Add. The Add permissions screen appears. Complete the following fields: Type of security entry select Allow or Deny from the drop-down menu Name type the name of the user or group that you want to add as a trustee for the folder From Location select the domain or the computer where the user or group is from On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user or group has been added as a trustee. If there is more than one match for the name entered, Mobile Admin displays a list so you can select a name.
To remove a trustee from a file

1 2
Follow the procedure To browse folders on page 35 and browse to the file from which you want to remove a trustee. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the file properties.
40
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Using Net Send
3 4
On the menu, click Security. The Access Control Settings screen appears. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected user or group as a permission entry. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user or group was removed.
Using Net Send

You can use Net Send in Mobile Admin to send a popup message to a Windows computer.
Note
To use Net Send successfully, the Messenger service must be running on the Windows computer that you to send the message to. The Messenger service is not the same as Windows Messenger or MSN Messenger.
To send a pop-up message to a computer desktop

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Net Send icon. The Send Message screen appears. In the Message field, type the message that you would like to send. On the menu, click Send. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message has been sent.
2 3
Using NSLookup
You can use NSLookup in Mobile Admin to query Internet Domain Name Servers (DNS) from the server you selected from your server list. To use NSLookup
1 2
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the NSLookup icon. Complete the following fields: Hostname or IP type the domain name or IP address that you want to query Query Type select Address, Mail Exchange, Name Server, or Start of Authority from the drop-down menu On the menu, click Lookup. Mobile Admin performs the query and displays the results.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
41
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Using the ping function
Using the ping function

You can use the ping function in Mobile Admin to determine if a specific IP address is accessible from the server you are managing. To ping an IP address
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Ping icon. The Ping screen appears. Complete the following fields: Hostname or IP type the hostname or the IP address that you want to ping Ping Count type the number of pings you want to send to the IP address On the menu, click Send Ping. Mobile Admin performs the query and displays the results.
Managing printers
You can use Mobile Admin to manage printers, including viewing printers, viewing print jobs, cancelling print jobs and pausing/resuming printers. To view printers From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Printers icon. The Printers screen appears and displays the list of printers that you have access to from the server you selected.
To view print jobs

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Printers icon. The Printers screen appears and displays the list of printers that you have access to from the server you selected. Scroll to the printer you want to view print jobs for, and then click Select on the menu. To view detailed information about a specific print job, scroll to the print job, and then click Select on the menu.
2 3
To cancel a print job

Note
To cancel a single print job, the computer or server that you are logged into must be locally/directly connected to the printer that has the print job you want to cancel. From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Printers icon.
42
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Restarting servers
The Printers screen appears and displays the list of printers that you have access to from the server you selected.
2
Scroll to the printer that is printing or queuing the print job you want to cancel, and then click Select on the menu. Mobile Admin displays a list of current print jobs for the printer you selected. Scroll to the print job you want to cancel and then click Cancel on the menu. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the print job has been cancelled.
To cancel all print jobs

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Printers icon. The Printers screen appears and displays the list of printers that you have access to from the server you selected. Scroll to the printer you want to cancel print jobs for, and then click Select on the menu. Mobile Admin displays a list of current print jobs for the printer you selected. On the menu, click Cancel All Jobs. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the print jobs have been cancelled.
2 3
To pause or resume a printer Use this procedure to pause a printer, or to resume a printer that has been paused.
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Printers icon. The Printers screen appears and displays the list of printers that you have access to from the server you selected. Scroll to the printer you want to pause or resume, and then click Select on the menu. On the menu, click Pause or Resume. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the printer has been paused or resumed.
2 3
Restarting servers
You can use Mobile Admin to shutdown or restart the server you have selected from the server list, or to log a user off the selected server. To restart a server
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Restart icon. The Restart screen appears. On the menu, click Restart. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to restart the selected server. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the server has been restarted.
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
43
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Running programs
To shutdown a server
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Restart icon. The Restart screen appears. On the menu, click Shutdown. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to shutdown the selected computer. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the server has been shut down.
2 3
To log off a user who is currently logged in

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Restart icon. The Logout screen appears. On the menu, click Log Off User. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to shutdown the selected computer. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user has been logged out.
2 3
Running programs
You can use Mobile Admin to run a program on the server that you have selected from the server list. To run a program
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Run Program icon. The Run Program screen appears. In the Program field, type the name of the program that you want to run. You must type the full path for the program, unless the program is located in the default path for the system you are managing. On the menu, click Run. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the program ran successfully.
Managing scheduled tasks

You can use Mobile Admin to view, add, and delete scheduled tasks on the server that you have selected from the server list. To view scheduled tasks From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Scheduled Tasks icon.
44
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Managing scheduled tasks
The Scheduled Tasks screen appears and displays a list of scheduled tasks for the selected server. To create a new task
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Scheduled Tasks icon. The Scheduled Tasks screen appears and displays a list of scheduled tasks for the selected server. On the menu, click New Task. The Create Scheduled Task screen appears. In the Name field, type a name for the new task. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the task has been created. Click OK. The Scheduled Task screen for the new task appears. Complete the following fields: Run type the path for the program you want to run as a scheduled task. If the task program requires parameters, type them after the task path. If the path to the program includes spaces, type double quotation marks () around the path. Start In specify the folder that you want the program to run in. Comments type comments that you would like recorded in association with the task Enabled select this check box to enable the task, or clear it to disable the task Run As type the user account that runs the scheduled task. The default entry for this field is the domain name of the server you are logged into, and the user account that you logged in with, in the format domainname\username. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin saves the task and displays the Scheduled Task screen for the new task.
2 3 4 5 6
To create a schedule for a task

1
Do one of the following:

If Then
the Scheduled Task screen for a specific task is displayed the Scheduled Task screen is not displayed
go to step 2. From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Scheduled Tasks icon. The Scheduled Tasks screen appears and displays a list of scheduled tasks for the selected server. Select the task you want to create a schedule for and click Select on the menu. The Scheduled Tasks screen for the selected task appears and displays information about the task.
2 3
On the menu, click Schedule. The Schedule screen appears. On the menu, click New Schedule.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Managing scheduled tasks
The Schedule Type screen appears.

4 5 6
Select a type of schedule from the list. The New Schedule screen appears. Specify the schedule for the task. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new schedule was created. You can create multiple schedules for a task. To add another schedule for the same task, repeat step 3 through step 6.
Note
To change a schedule for a task

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Scheduled Tasks icon. The Scheduled Tasks screen appears and displays a list of scheduled tasks for the selected server. Scroll to the task that you want to select. On the menu, click Schedule. The Schedule screen appears. Scroll to the schedule that you want to change. On the menu, click Select. Change the schedule as required. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the schedule was modified.
2 3 4 5
To delete a schedule for a task

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Scheduled Tasks icon. The Scheduled Tasks screen appears and displays a list of scheduled tasks for the selected server. Scroll to the task that has the schedule you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The Scheduled Task screen for the selected task appears. On the menu, click Schedule. The Schedule screen appears. Scroll to the schedule you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the schedule. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the schedule was deleted.
2 3 4 5
To delete a scheduled task

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Scheduled Tasks icon. The Scheduled Tasks screen appears and displays a list of scheduled tasks for the selected server. Scroll to the task you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the task. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the task was deleted.
2 3
46
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Managing services
Managing services
You can use Mobile Admin to manage services on the server that you have selected from the server list, including stopping, starting, pausing, resuming, and restarting services. On a Windows PC, services are accessed through the Control Panel by selecting Administrative Tools, then Services. To view services From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server.
To stop a service
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server. Scroll to the service that you want to stop. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected service appears. On the menu, click Stop. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to stop the selected service. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the service is being stopped.
2 3 4
To start a service
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server. Scroll to the service that you want to start. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected service appears. On the menu, click Start. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the service has been started.
2 3
To start a service with parameters

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server. Scroll to the service that you want to start. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected service appears. On the menu, click Start with Parameters. The parameters screen for the selected service appears.
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
47
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Managing services
In the Start Parameters field, type the parameters that you want applied to a service when it is started. A backslash is treated as an escape character. Type two backslashes for each backslash in a parameter. On the menu, click Start. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the service has been started.
Note
To pause a service
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server. Scroll to the service that you want to pause. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected service appears. On the menu, click Pause. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to pause the selected service. Not all services can be paused. The option to pause a service appears in the menu only when it is a service that can be paused. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the service has been paused.
2 3
Note
To resume a paused service

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server. Scroll to the service that you want to resume. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected service appears. On the menu, click Resume. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the service has been resumed.
2 3
To restart a service
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server. Scroll to the service that you want to restart. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected service appears. On the menu, click Restart. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to restart the selected service. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the service has been restarted.
2 3 4
48
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Managing shared folders
To change the startup mode for a service

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Services icon. The Services screen appears and displays a list of services available for the selected server. Scroll to the service that you want to change the startup mode for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected service appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want the service to start automatically when the system starts you want the service to be started by a user or by a dependent service. you want the service to be disabled, so that it cannot be started by the system, users, or any dependent services
4
in the Startup Type field, select Automatic. in the Startup Type field, select Manual. (Manual services do not start automatically when the system starts. in the Startup Type field, select Disabled.
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new setting was saved.
Managing shared folders

You can use Mobile Admin to manage shared folders on the server that you have selected from the server list. To view shared folders From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Shared Folders icon. The Shares screen appears and displays a list of shared folders on the selected server.
To share an existing folder or drive

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Shared Folders icon. The Shares screen appears and displays a list of shared folders on the selected server. On the menu, click New Share. The Create Shared Folder screen appears. Complete the following fields: Folder to Share type the path of the folder or drive that you want to share Share Name type the name of the folder or drive Description type a description for the shared folder or drive
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
49
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Managing shared folders
Maximum Users type the number of users who may access the shared folder at the
same time. For an unlimited number of users, leave this field blank. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new shared folder was created.
To stop sharing a folder or drive

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Shared Folders icon. The Share screen appears and displays a list of shared folders on the selected server. Scroll to the folder or drive that you want to stop sharing. On the menu, click Select. The Share screen for the selected folder or drive appears. On the menu, click Stop Sharing. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to stop sharing the selected folder or drive. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the folder or drive is no longer shared.
2 3
To edit the description or change maximum users for a shared folder or drive
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Shared Folders icon. The Shares screen appears and displays a list of shared folders on the selected server. Scroll to the folder or drive that you want to change share settings for. On the menu, click Select. The Share screen for the selected folder or drive appears. Modify the following fields: Description type the new description for the shared folder or drive Maximum Users type the number of users who may access the shared folder at the same time. For an unlimited number of users, leave this field blank. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To change permissions for a shared folder or drive

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Shared Folders icon. The Shares screen appears and displays a list of shared folders on the selected server. Scroll to the folder or drive that you want to change permissions for. On the menu, click Select. The Share screen for the selected folder or drive appears. On the menu, click Permissions. The Permissions screen for the selected folder or drive appears, and displays a list of users and groups who have permissions for the selected shared folder or drive. Scroll to the user or group whose permissions you would like to view or edit. On the menu, click Select.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
50
Managing Microsoft Windows Viewing system information
The Permission Entry screen for that user or group and for that folder or drive appears.
5 6
Click the user or group whose permissions you would like to view or edit. The Permission Entry screen for that user or group appears. To edit shared folder or drive permissions for the selected user or group, select or clear the check boxes for each type of permission as required. To select or clear a check box, scroll to the permission, and then click Change Option on the menu. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new permissions were saved.
To add a trustee to a shared folder

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Shared Folders icon. The Shares screen appears and displays a list of shared folders on the selected server. Scroll to the folder or drive that you want to change permissions for. On the menu, click Select. The Share screen for the selected folder or drive appears. On the menu, click Permissions. The Permissions screen for the selected folder or drive appears. On the menu, click Add. The Add permissions screen appears. Complete the following fields: Type of security entry select Allow or Deny from the drop-down menu Name type the name of the user or group that you want to add as a trustee for the folder From Location select the domain or the computer where the user or group is from On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user or group has been added as a trustee. If there is more than one match for the name entered, Mobile Admin displays a list so you can select a name.
3 4 5
Viewing system information

You can use Mobile Admin to access system information about the server that you have selected from the server list. System information includes details about the operating system (version and manufacturer), the system manufacturer, model and type, the total and free physical memory, the free virtual memory, and the available disk space on the system drive(s). To view system information From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the System Information icon. The System Information screen appears and displays information about the selected server.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
51
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Managing processes with the Task Manager
Managing processes with the Task Manager

You can use Mobile Admin to view and kill processes running on the server that you have selected from the server list, or view system performance information. System performance information includes CPU usage, and total and available physical memory. To view processes
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Task Manager icon. The Windows Task Manager screen appears. Scroll to Processes. On the menu, click Select. The Processes screen appears and displays a list of the processes that are currently running on the selected server.
To kill a process
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Task Manager icon. The Windows Task Manager screen appears. Scroll to Processes. On the menu, click Select. The Processes screen appears and displays a list of the processes that are currently running on the selected server. Scroll to the process that you want to kill. On the menu, click Select. The Process screen appears for the process you have selected. On the menu, click Kill. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to kill the selected process. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the process was killed.
3 4 5
To view performance
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Task Manager icon. The Windows Task Manager screen appears. Scroll to Performance. On the menu, click Select. The Performance screen appears and displays performance information about the selected server, including total and available physical memory.
Managing Terminal Services

You can use Mobile Admin to manage Terminal Services on the server you have selected. To view a Terminal Services connection
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Terminal Services icon.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
52
Managing Microsoft Windows Tracing a route
The Terminal Services Manager screen appears and displays the current connections.
2
Scroll to the connection that you wish to view. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays information about the connection.
To reset a Terminal Services connection

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Terminal Services icon. The Terminal Services Manager screen appears and displays the current connections. Scroll to the connection that you want to reset. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays information about the connection. On the menu, click Reset. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to reset the selected connection. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the connection has been reset.
2 3 4
To disconnect a Terminal Services connection

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Terminal Services icon. The Terminal Services Manager screen appears and displays the current connections. Scroll to the connection that you want to disconnect. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays information about the connection. On the menu, click Disconnect. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to disconnect the selected connection. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the connection has been disconnected.
2 3 4
To send a message using Terminal Services

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Terminal Services icon. The Terminal Services Manager screen appears and displays the current connections. Scroll to the connection that you want to send a message to. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays information about the connection. On the menu, click Send Message. The Send Message screen appears. Type the message you want to send. On the menu, click Send. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message was sent.
2 3 4
Tracing a route
You can use Mobile Admin to trace a route from the server that you have selected to another server.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
53
Manag ing Microso ft Wi ndo ws Managing users and groups
To trace a route
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Trace Route icon. The Trace Route screen appears. In the Hostname or IP field, type the hostname or the IP address for which you want to trace the route. If you want to have the trace route program return the names of the routers, select the Resolve Names check box. On the menu, click Trace. Mobile Admin traces the route and displays the results.
2 3 4
Managing users and groups

You can use Mobile Admin to manage local Windows users and groups, as well as NT domain users, on the server that you selected from the server list. To view users
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Users folder. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears.
To view groups
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Groups folder. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears.
To create a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Users folder. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears. On the menu, click New User. The New User screen appears. Complete the following fields: User Name type a user name for the new user. The new user will have to type their user name when they log in to Windows. For example: jsmith Full Name type the full name of the user. For example: Jane Smith
2 3 4
54
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Managing users and groups
Description type a description for the user Password type a password for the user Confirm type the password again
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new user was saved.
To reset a user password

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Users folder. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears. Scroll to the user you want to reset a password for and click Select. The Local User screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Set Password. The Set Password screen appears. Complete the following fields: New Password type a new password for the user Confirm type the password again On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new password was set.
2 3 4 5
To change user settings

Note
1
To change a user name, see To rename a user on page 56. From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Users folder. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears. Scroll to the user you want to change user settings for and click Select. The Local User screen for the selected user appears. Modify the following fields as required: Full Name type a new full name for the user Description type a description for the user User must change password at next logon select this check box to force the user to change his or her password at next logon User cannot change password select this check box to prevent the user from changing passwords, or clear it to allow the user to change passwords Password never expires select this check box to prevent the password from expiring, or clear it to allow the password to expire Account is disabled select this check box to disable the user account, or clear it to enable the account On the menu, click Save.
2 3 4
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved. To rename a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Users folder. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears. Scroll to the user you want to change user settings for and click Select. The Local User screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Rename. The Rename screen appears. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user name was successfully changed.
2 3 4 5
To add a user to a group (when managing users)

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Users folder. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears. Scroll to the user you want to add to a group or groups, and click Select. The Local User screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Member of. The Groups screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Add. The Add screen appears. In the Name field, type the name of the group. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was successfully added to the specified group. If there is more than one match for the name entered, Mobile Admin displays a list so you can select a name.
2 3 4 5 6 7
To remove a user from a group (when managing users)

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Users folder. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears. Scroll to the user you want to change user settings for and click Select. The Local User screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Member of. The Groups screen for the selected user appears.
2 3 4
56
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Windows Managing users and groups
Scroll to the group that you want to remove the user from. On the menu, click Remove from Group. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the user from the specified group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was successfully removed from the specified group.
To create a new group

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Groups folder. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears. On the menu, click New Group. The New Group screen appears.
Group Name type a name for the new group Group Description type a description for the group
2 3
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new group was successfully created.
To rename a group
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Groups folder. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears. Scroll to the group you want to rename. On the menu, click Select. The Local Group screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click Rename. The Rename screen appears. In the Group Name field, type a new name for the group. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new group name was saved.
2 3 4 5 6
To add a user or group to a group (when managing groups)

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Groups folder. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears. Scroll to the group you want to add a user to. On the menu, click Select. The Local Group screen for the selected group appears.
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
57
4 5 6
On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears. On the menu, click Add Member. The Add Members screen appears. Complete the following fields: Name type the name of the user that you want to add to the group From Location select the domain or the computer where the user is from On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was added to the group. If there is more than one match for the name entered, Mobile Admin displays a list so you can select a name.
To remove a user or group from a group (when managing groups)

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the User and Group Manager icon. The Local Users and Groups screen appears. Scroll to the Groups folder. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears. Scroll to the group you want to remove a user or group from. On the menu, click Select. The Local Group screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears. Scroll to the user or group that you want to remove from the group. On the menu, click Remove Member. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected user from the group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was removed from the group.
2 3 4 5
58
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
C o n n e c t i n g w i t h S S H / Te l n e t About SSH/Telnet
Connecting with SSH/Telnet

This chapter provides information about how to connect to a server with SSH/Telnet from Mobile Admin.
About SSH/Telnet
Mobile Admin allows you to connect to servers with SSH and Telnet from your BlackBerry smartphone, Android device, Windows Mobile or iPhone/iPod Touch device. VT100, IBM 5250, and IBM 3270 terminal emulation are supported for wireless access to a wide range of network devices and applications.
Note:
5250 and 3270 terminal emulation is currently only supported on BlackBerry handhelds. Supported network devices You can use Mobile Admin to create SSH/Telnet terminal sessions to the following: Unix servers Linux servers Cisco routers and switches Novell Netware AS/400 and iSeries servers, using TN5250 IBM mainframes and other 3270 devices, using TN3270 any other network device that supports Telnet or SSH
SSH/Telnet security
Mobile Admin supports several SSH/Telnet encryption and authentication options. Encryption for all SSH connections When you create an SSH2 connection to a network device using Mobile Admin through a BES, all connection data between the wireless device and the network device is encrypted with Triple Data Encryption Standard (TDES) or Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). The US Government has security-certified TDES and AES as compliant with Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS). Authentication Mobile Admin supports standard authentication mechanisms for SSH, Telnet, IBM 5250 and IBM 3270 sessions (for example, user logins on devices where these have been configured).
Mobile Admin v. 5.1 Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide 59
C o n n e c t i n g w i t h S S H / Te l n e t Getting started with SSH/Telnet
For SSH2, Mobile Admin supports password authentication and: public key authentication Keyboard-Interactive Authentication, which allows you to configure additional authentication methods on SSH2 servers and devices in your network
Getting started with SSH/Telnet

In most cases, in order to connect to a server using SSH/Telnet, the target server must be in your Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, or SSH/Telnet must be listed in the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen. To access a server using SSH/Telnet
1 2
Log in to Mobile Admin. The home screen appears. If required,select the server you want to access using SSH/Telnet through the Manage Servers screen and select the SSH icon. Also, you may select an SSH icon through the Manage Services screen. The SSH/Telnet Settings screen appears populated with default connection settings. If a default username and password is displayed, the default credentials used are the credentials you used to log in to Mobile Admin, or the alternate credentials you specified for the server being managed. In the Username and Password fields, enter the login credentials for the SSH/Telnet server.
Note
Select Connect on the menu if the default connection settings are suitable. To modify default connection settings, see Managing connection settings on page 60.To disconnect a SSH/Telnet session
1 2
From the Terminal screen, select Disconnect on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you if you are sure you want to disconnect. Select Yes. Your SSH/Telnet session disconnects. Managing connection settings You can manage the default connection settings provided by Mobile Admin to better suit your needs. Default connection settings can either be managed from the SSH/Telnet login screen, or from within an active SSH/Telnet connection.
60
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The following connection settings can be managed: Proxy use Term Type Font Size Rows Columns Scrollback Lines Line Wrap Local Input Buffer Force Local Echo Keep Alive SSH2 Private key Device Name (TN5250 Only) SSH Version 2 Foreground Colour Background Colour Enter Sends
To manage connection settings (BlackBerry, Android, Windows Mobile, iPhone/iPod Touch)

1
Perform one of the following: a To manage connection settings from the SSH/Telnet login screen, follow the procedure To access a server using SSH/Telnet on page 60, up to and including step 3. b To manage connection settings from within an SSH/Telnet session, select Settings on the menu. The SSH/Telnet Settings screen appears populated with default connection settings. Modify the following fields, as required: Mobile Admin Proxy - select this check box to use the proxy provided by Mobile Admin. The proxy is provided in order to facilitate SSH/Telnet connections in network environments where direct paths between your device and the target server (such as networks with a BES) are not easily created. In order to use the proxy provided, a Mobile Admin administrator must configure the port. For more information, see Chapter 3: Administering Mobile Admin in the Mobile Admin Server Installation and Configuration Guide. Term Type - Choose the terminal type string to use with this connection from the drop-down menu (vt100, TN5250, or TN3270). The default is vt100. Windows Mobile devices only support vt100 terminal type strings.
Font Size Choose the size of text to be used on the terminal screen from the dropdown menu. Small (5) and Normal (7) will use the default font type. Rows Enter the number of rows for the terminal session in the text field. The default
Note
number of rows is the maximum number of rows that will fit on the screen without scrolling. Increasing the number of rows above the default will require scrolling to see parts of the screen. Columns Enter the number of columns for the terminal session in the text field.The default number of columns is the maximum number of columns that will fit on the screen without scrolling. Increasing the number of columns above the default will require scrolling to see parts of the screen. Scrollback Lines Enter the number of lines to save in the scrollback buffer in the text field. Line Wrap Select this check box to enable line wrapping, or clear it to disable line wrapping.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
61
Local Input Buffer Select this check box if you want the terminal screen to be in local
input mode.
Force Local Echo Off Select this check box to force Telnet local echo off, regardless of
server or network device settings. Clear this check box to leave local echo on by default, unless it is turned off by the server or network device. Keep Alive Select this check box if you want Mobile Admin to send data during periods of inactivity to keep the connection open. Although Rove recommends selecting this check box for most connections, it may cause problems with some servers and network devices.
Note
Keep Alive is always on for Android devices.

SSH2 Private Key Enter the contents of your SSH2 private key file in OpenSSH format in the field, using one of the following methods: - Manually type the contents This method can be time-consuming, but it is generally the most secure way to enter a private key. - E-mail the contents of the file to your wireless device This method is secure if you are using a VPN or a BlackBerry Enterprise Server to connect; otherwise it is not secure. The contents of the email, once on your device, can be copied and pasted. Rove recommends that you delete the email after the private key data has been entered. - Paste the contents of the file into a memo on your computer, then synchronize your BlackBerry smartphone with the Desktop Manager This method is very secure if you are using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server to connect. The contents of the memo, once on your device, can be copied and pasted. Rove recommends that you delete the memo after the private key data has been entered.
Note
Rove recommends that you protect your private key with a passphrase for maximum security. If you enter a password in the Password field on the Connection screen, it will be used as the passphrase. If you have not specified a password, and your private key is passphrase protected, you will be prompted to enter a passphrase when you connect to the SSH server.
Device Name (exclusive to TN5250 connections) Enter the name of the device to be
sent to the AS/400 or iSeries server.

Use SSH Version 2 Select this check box if you want to use SSH Version 2 to connect
with SSH2 if the server supports it. Foreground Modify the R, G, and B values for the foreground and cursor colour of the terminal screen from the menu. Background Modify the R, G, and B values for the background color of the terminal screen from the menu. Enter Sends Select the character to be sent when you press the Enter key on your wireless device. For SSH connections, choose CR (carriage return) or LF (linefeed). For Telnet connections, choose CRLF (carriage return + linefeed) or LF (linefeed).
Perform one of the following: a If modifications were made from the SSH/Telnet Settings screen, click Connect and Save on the menu. b If modifications were made from within a SSH/Telnet session, click Save on the menu. If the settings were modified from within a SSH/Telnet session, a dialog box will appear informing you that your changes will take effect once you exit the current session and restart the connection.
62
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
C o n n e c t i n g w i t h S S H / Te l n e t Using the Terminal Screen
Managing server properties You can manage the default server properties provided by Mobile Admin to better suit your needs. Default server properties are managed from the server page. To manage SSH/Telnet port numbers
1 2 3 4 5 6
Log in to Mobile Admin. The home screen appears. Select the SSH or Telnet server you want to access through the Manage Servers screen. Select Server Properties on the menu. The Server Properties for servername page opens. Modify the port number fields as required. Select Save on the menu. The Saved server properties dialog box appears. Select OK. The updated Manage servername page opens The SSH and Telnet ports can also be set when initially adding a SSH or Telnet service to the Manage Services screen.
Note
Using the Terminal Screen

The Terminal screen appears when you have made a successful SSH/Telnet connection. To enable or disable scrolling (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile and Android devices only) From the Terminal screen, select Enable/Disable Scrolling on the menu.
Enable Scrolling When scrolling is enabled, you can scroll up and down the text on
the screen by rolling the trackwheel, clicking the D-pad, or tapping the screen, depending on your device. This is useful if you need to see text entered or received earlier in the session. To scroll left and right, hold the Alt key and roll the trackwheel/ click the D-pad, or drag left or right. Disable Scrolling (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile only) If scrolling is disabled and local input mode is enabled, and there is text in the local input buffer, rolling the trackwheel/ clicking the D-pad moves the cursor through the local input text. In all other cases, rolling the trackwheel/ clicking the D-pad sends up and down cursor keypresses; or, if you hold the Alt key and roll the trackwheel, right and left keypresses. Disable Scrolling (Android only) If scrolling is disabled, touches on the screen or movements of the trackball will not impact the view.
To enable or disable local input mode (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile and Android devices only) From the Terminal screen, select Enable/Disable Local Input on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
63
Enable Local Input When local input mode is enabled, Mobile Admin will not send any typed characters until you press Enter on your wireless device, or click Send (or Send with Enter) on the menu. If you press Enter or click Send (or Send with Enter) on
the menu, a carriage return (CR) will be sent at the end of the typed characters. Control characters (for example, CTRL+C) and Function keys are sent as soon as they are typed. Disable Local Input (wireless devices with full keypad only) When local input mode is disabled, Mobile Admin sends each character when you type it. It can be useful to disable local input mode for highly interactive applications such as Pine or VI. With local input mode, usage can be slightly slower because it takes a small amount of time for each character to be sent over the wireless network.
To change the font size on the fly Select the Increase Font Size or Decrease Font Size menu item, or hold down the Shift key and scroll the trackball/wheel up or down to increase or decrease font size, respectively. This feature is not currently supported on Windows Mobile devices. For iPhone/iPod Touch devices, pinching and touch gestures can be used to zoom and pan the terminal display.
Note
To enter control (CTRL) characters From the Terminal screen, select CTRL+ on the menu, then press the letter to send, or press SHIFT+Space on your wireless keypad. (This shortcut key combination is not available on BlackBerry 7100 series.) For example, to send CTRL +C, click CTRL+ on the menu, then press C on the keypad. For iPhone/iPod Touch devices, touch the CTRL button located at the top of the screen, then press the letter to send. For Android devices, select CTRL from the dropdown list in the menu, then press the letter to send.
To enter alternate (ALT) characters From the Terminal screen, select ALT+ on the menu, then press the letter to send, or press Alt+Space on your wireless keypad. (This shortcut key combination is not available on BlackBerry 7100 series.) For example, to send ALT +A, click ALT+ on the menu, then press A on the keypad. For iPhone/iPod Touch devices, touch the ALT button located at the top of the screen, then press the letter to send. For Android devices, select ALT from the dropdown list in the menu, then press the letter to send.
64
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To enter special keys From the Terminal screen, select Special Keys on the menu, or press Alt+Enter or Alt+Sym on your wireless device keypad to enter keys including ESC, TAB, and F1; or 5250 special keys such as Field Exit and Field Next. For iPhone/iPod Touch devices, touch the Tab..., F or arrow buttons to show an button overlay of available special keys. Press the button corresponding to the special key required. For Android devices, select the desired special key from the dropdown list in the menu.
About macros For all Blackberry smartphones except models equipped with a Suretype keyboard (e.g. Pearl), special keys (such as function keys, ESC, and TAB) can be mapped to keys on the keyboard so that they are easier for you to access. For example, you could map the TAB key to the letter Q on the keyboard, so that Alt+Q sends a TAB character.
Note
Macros are not currently supported on Windows Mobile, iPhone/iPod Touch or Android devices.
To configure macros
1 2 3
From the Terminal screen, select Edit macros. The connection type Macros page opens. Select Add Macro from the menu. A dialog box appears prompting you to press the key to associate with the macro. Follow the prompts to add a macro.
To delete macros
1 2
From the Terminal screen, select Edit macros. The connection type Macros page opens. Scroll to the macro you want to delete, then select Delete Macro on the menu. The updated connection type Macro page is displayed.
To send characters without sending a carriage return (CR) or enter character (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile devices only) On BlackBerry and Windows Mobile devices, open the menu on the Terminal screen, and select Send. Mobile Admin sends the characters in the local input buffer.
To clear server key cache From the Terminal screen, click Clear Server key Cache on the menu.
To enable or disable autoscrolling mode (Android devices only) From the Terminal screen, select Enable/Disable Auto Scroll on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
65
Enable Auto Scroll When autoscroll mode is enabled, Mobile Admin will automatically scroll the terminal view to show newmodifications if those modifications are not on-screen. Disable Auto Scroll When autoscroll mode is disabled, Mobile Admin will ignore any new modifications occurring outside the terminal view, and will not scroll to them.
To enable or disable the soft keyboard (Android devices only) From the Terminal screen, and with the display in Portrait orientation, select Toggle Soft Keyboard on the menu. The soft keyboard will be shown or hidden depending on its current state.
66
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Connecting with RDP/VNC About RDP/VNC
Connecting with RDP/VNC

This chapter provides information about how to connect to a computer with RDP/VNC from Mobile Admin.
Note Note
RDP connections are not supported on Windows Mobile devices. VNC connections are not supported on iPhone/iPod Touch devices.
About RDP/VNC
Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) is a communications protocol that allows you to connect securely to any server that is running Terminal Services or Remote Desktop. Mobile Admin acts as a Terminal Services or Remote Desktop client on your wireless device and to process keyboard and mouse data from the remote server. VNC is a client-server protocol. A VNC client connects to a VNC server to receive screen updates and to process keyboard and mouse movements. For VNC connections, Mobile Admin acts as a VNC client on your wireless device. Mobile Admin allows you to use your wireless device to view and control the desktop of any server, provided the following conditions are met: the server is running Microsoft Terminal Services (on Windows 2000 or 2003) or Microsoft Remote Desktop (on Windows XP); or the computer has a Virtual Network Computing (VNC) server installed you have permission to access the server
RDP/VNC security
Mobile Admin supports several RDP/VNC security options. Security with a BlackBerry Enterprise Server If you are using a BlackBerry Enterprise Server, all data sent between the BlackBerry Enterprise Server and the BlackBerry smartphones is encrypted with TDES or AES. This applies to both Terminal Services or Remote Desktop and VNC connections. Security for Terminal Services and Remote Desktop connections Microsoft Terminal Services and Remote Desktop connections are always secured through the use of RC4 encryption. In some cases, you may need to configure a computers firewall to connect with RDP.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
67
Connecting with RDP/VNC Preparing for RDP/VNC connections
Preparing for RDP/VNC connections

Prior to connecting with RDP/VNC, ensure the following conditions are met: For Terminal Services or Remote Desktop connections, make sure that the server you want to connect to is running Microsoft Terminal Services or Remote Desktop, and is connected to the Internet. For VNC connections, ensure that a VNC server is installed on the server that you want to connect to, and that the server is connected to the Internet. There are a number of VNC servers available for download on the Internet. Some VNC servers are free and others must be purchased. We recommend that you evaluate the various options available relative to your requirements. Some providers of VNC servers include: - Real VNC http://www.realvnc.com - Ultra VNC http://www.ultravnc.com
Note
For more information about how VNC technology works, go to http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/VNC.
Getting started with RDP/VNC

In most cases, in order to connect to a server using RDP/VNC, the target server must be in your Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, or RDP/VNC must be listed in the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen. To access a computer using RDP/VNC
1 2
Log in to Mobile Admin. The home screen appears. If required,select the server you want to access using VNC/RDP through the Manage Servers screen and select the VNC or RDP icon. Also, you may select the icon through the Manage Services screen. The RDP/VNC Settings screen appears populated with default connection settings. If a default username and password is displayed, the default credentials used are the credentials you used to log in to Mobile Admin, or the alternate credentials you specified for the server being managed. Enter the login credentials for the RDP/VNC computer in the Username (RDP only) and Password fields. Upon login, a blank screen is occasionally displayed on first-time VNC connections. If this happens, restart the VNC server and repeat this procedure.
Note
Note
68
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Connecting with RDP/VNC Getting started with RDP/VNC
Select Connect on the menu if the default connection settings are suitable. To modify default connection settings, see Your RDP/VNC session disconnects. on page 69. After a few minutes of an RDP connection over a BlackBerry Enterprise Server, you may be logged out and receive an error message. This can occur because there is a setting on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server that limits the amount of data that is allowed to be transmitted to and from your device during a single connection. To prevent this from happening, you can contact your BlackBerry Enterprise Server administrator and request that your per-connection data limit be raised to the maximum allowed, or you can choose connection settings that use less data, such as a lower resolution.
Tip
To disconnect a RDP/VNC session

1
From within an RDP/VNC connection, select Disconnect on the menu. On iPhone/iPod Touch, press the Disconnect button located in the top left-hand corner of the screen. A dialog box appears asking you if you are sure you want to disconnect. Select Yes. Your RDP/VNC session disconnects.
Managing connection settings You can manage the default connection settings provided by Mobile Admin to better suit your needs. Default connection settings can either be managed from the RDP/VNC login screen, or from within an active RDP/VNC session. The following connection settings can be managed: Domain (RDP only) Compression (VNC only) Zoom Resolution (RDP only) Pan Position Proxy use
To manage connection settings

1
Perform one of the following: a To manage connection settings from the RDP/VNC login screen, follow the procedureTo access a computer using RDP/VNC on page 68, up to and including step 3. b To manage connection setting from within an active RDP/VNC connection, select Settings on the menu. The RDP/VNC Settings screen appears populated with your connection settings. Modify the following fields, as required: Domain (RDP only, optional) Enter the domain name to use with the account. Encoding (VNC only) Select the compression type from the drop-down menu: - Raw uses the most data and is the slowest because it does not perform any compression. - Hextile is the fastest but uses more data. - Zlib (Windows Mobile devices only) works better with TightVNC.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Connecting with RDP/VNC Using RDP/VNC
- ZRLE is slower but uses much less data. Zoom Select the zoom level for the computer screen you are connecting to from the drop-down menu. Choose 1 to view it at full size, 2 to view it at half size, or 4 to view it at quarter size. Resolution (RDP only) Select the dimensions you want the desktop to be, in pixels, from the drop-down menu. A smaller resolution will result in a faster connection and less data being transmitted. Pan Position Select what part of the desktop screen you would like to be displayed initially from the drop-down menu: TopLeft, TopRight, BottomLeft, BottomRight or Center (when you first view the screen of the computer you are connecting to, you will only see a section of it on the smaller screen of your wireless device). Mobile Admin Proxy - select this check box to use the proxy provided by Mobile Admin. The proxy is provided in order to facilitate RDP/VNC connections in network environments where direct paths between your device and the target server (such as networks with a BES) are not easily created. In order to use the proxy provided, a Mobile Admin administrator must configure the port. For more information, see Chapter 3: Administering Mobile Admin in the Mobile Admin Server Installation and Configuration Guide.
Managing server properties You can manage the default server properties provided by Mobile Admin to better suit your needs. Default server properties are managed from the server page, or from the Add Services screen when the service is first being added to Mobile Admin. To manage RDP/VNC port numbers
1 2 3 4 5 6
Log in to Mobile Admin. The home screen appears. Select the RDP or VNC server you want to access through the Manage Servers screen. Select Server Properties on the menu. The Server Properties for servername page opens. Modify the port number fields as required. Select Save on the menu. The Saved server properties dialog box appears. Select OK. The updated Manage servername page opens The RDP or VNC ports can also be set when initially adding a RDP or VNC service to the Manage Services screen.
Note
Using RDP/VNC
Mobile Admin gives you full control of the remote server, including the ability to send right and left mouse clicks, press CTRL+ALT+DEL, and move the mouse.
70
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To move the mouse On BlackBerry smartphones or Android devices featuring a trackball, roll the trackball up, down, left or right. On BlackBerry smartphones featuring a trackwheel, roll the trackwheel up and down. For left/right movement, hold down the ALT key while rolling the trackwheel up and down. On iPhone/iPod Touch devices, Android devices and BlackBerry smartphones featuring a touch screen, drag your finger on the screen in the direction you want to pan to. On other devices, use the D-pad.
To send a left mouse click On BlackBerry smartphones and Android devices featuring a trackball/trackwheel, press the trackball/trackwheel. On iPhone/iPod Touch devices, Android devices and BlackBerry smartphones featuring a touch screen, press the screen where you want to click. On other devices, press the Action button (centre of the D-pad), or select Left Click on the menu.
To send right mouse click Press ALT+SPACE on the device keyboard, or select Right Click on the menu. On iPhone/iPod Touch, touch and hold for 3 seconds.
To send double mouse click Select Double Click on the menu. On iPhone/iPod Touch and Android devices, rapidly touch the screen twice.
To send keyboard strokes on devices with a QWERTY keyboard Press the keys on the device keyboard. For additional symbols, press SYM.To send keyboard strokes on devices with a 12-key keyboard
1 2
Select Send Input on the menu. A dialog box appears. Input text, then select Send Text on the menu.
To send extra commands Press ALT+SYM on the device keyboard, or select Show Extras on the menu.To send CTRL+ALT+DEL Select CTRL+ALT+DEL on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
71
To zoom out and see a larger portion of the screen Select Zoom Out on the menu. On iPhone/iPod Touch, pinch and drag gestures on the touch screen zoom and pan the screen.
To zoom in and see more detail Select Zoom In on the menu. On iPhone/iPod Touch, pinch and drag gestures on the touch screen zoom and pan the screen.
To view the total amount of network data used thus far (BlackBerry, Windows Mobile only) Select Data Usage on the menu. Mobile Admin displays the amount of data transmitted over the network.
To enable or disable the soft keyboard (Android devices only)

1
From the Terminal screen, and with the display in Portrait orientation, select Toggle Soft Keyboard on the menu. The soft keyboard will be shown or hidden depending on its current state.
72
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Activ e Directo ry Browsing the Active Directory tree
Managing Microsoft Active Directory

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Active Directory.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected an Active Directory server to manage from your server list.
Browsing the Active Directory tree

You can browse the Active Directory tree in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To browse the Active Directory tree From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders.
Managing users
You can manage users with Mobile Admin for the Active Directory server you have selected. To create a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Navigate to the folder where you want to create a new user. On the menu, click New User. The New User screen appears.
First Name type the given name of the user Last Name type the surname of the user
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
73
Manag ing Microso ft Act ive Direct ory Managing users
perform one of the following:

If Then
the user needs to be able to logon to computers that are versions earlier than Windows 2000 (for example, Windows 98) the user does not need to be able to logon to computers that are versions earlier than Windows 2000
5
enter a logon for the user in the Logon (pre-w2k) field. enter a logon for the user in the Logon field.
Click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new user was created.
To view a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Navigate to the location of the user that you want to view, and scroll to the user name. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears and displays a list of users. To view details about a specific user, scroll to the user name. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears.
To edit user settings

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and select the user that you want to edit user settings for. Edit the following fields as required: First Name type the first name of the user Last Name type the last name of the user Display Name type the display name for the user E-mail type an email address for the user Logon Name type a logon name for the user Logon Name (pre-w2k) type an eight-character logon name for the user, for use on pre-Windows 2000 computers Phone type a phone number for the user Address type a street or post office address for the user City type the name of the city or town where the user is located Postal Code type the postal code for the user User must change password at next logon select this check box if you want to force the user to change their user password the next time they logon User cannot change password select this check box if you want to prevent the user from changing their password Password never expires select this check box if you want to prevent the password from expiring Account expires end of enter the date by which this account will expire Click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
74
Manag ing Microso ft Activ e Directo ry Managing users
To reset a user password

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and select the user whose password you want to reset. On the menu, click Reset Password. The Reset Password screen appears. Complete the following fields: New Password type a new password for the user Confirm type the password a second time to confirm User must change password at next logon select or clear the check box, as required On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new password was set.
To add a user to a group

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and select the user who you want to add to a group. On the menu, click Member of. The Member screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Add. The Add Member screen appears. In the Name field, type the names of the group(s) to which you want to add the selected user. Separate each group with a comma. On the menu, click Add Group. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was successfully added to the specified group(s).
To remove a user from a group

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and select the user who you want to remove from a group. On the menu, click Member of. The Member screen for the selected user appears and displays all the groups that the user is a member of. Scroll to the group from which you want to remove the user. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the user from the selected group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user has been removed from the selected group.
To disable a user
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view details for the user that you want to disable. On the menu, click Disable. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to disable the selected user account.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Act ive Direct ory Managing users
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was disabled.
To enable a disabled user

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view details for the disabled user that you want to enable. On the menu, click Enable. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was enabled.
To unlock a user Use this procedure to unlock a user who has been locked out of their account as a result of too many failed login attempts.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view details for the user that you want to unlock. On the menu, click Unlock. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to unlock the selected user account. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was unlocked.
To rename a user
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view details for the user that you want to rename. On the menu, click Rename. The Rename screen appears. In the New Name field, type the new name for the user. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new name was saved.
To delete a user
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view details for the user that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected user account. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was deleted.
To edit a user profile

1
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view details for the user whose profile you want to edit.
76
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Activ e Directo ry Managing groups
2 3
On the menu, click Profile. The Profile screen for the selected user appears. Edit the following fields as required: Profile path Type a path for the profile. Logon script Type the name of the logon script to use. Home folder drive Select the drive for the home folder. Home folder path Type the path for the home folder on the selected drive. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
Managing groups
You can manage groups with Mobile Admin for the Active Directory server you have selected. To create a group
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Navigate to the folder where you want to create a new group. On the menu, click New Group. The New Group screen appears. Complete the following fields: Group Name if the server is Windows 2000 or later, type a name for the group in this field Group Name (pre-w2k) if the server is a version from before Windows 2000, type a name for the group if you are working on Group Type from drop-down menu, select Security - Domain local, Security - Global, Distribution - Domain local, Distribution On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was saved. Close the message window. The group Properties screen appears. Complete the following fields: Description type a description of the group Email type an email address for the new group On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new group was created successfully.
2 3 4
5 6 7
To view/edit a group
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Act ive Direct ory Managing groups
The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders.
2 3 4 5
Navigate to the folder that contains the group you want to view. Scroll to the group you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The group Properties screen appears. To edit the group, change the following fields as required: Group Name (pre-w2k) type a name for the group (maximum eight characters, to be compatible with pre-Windows 2000 systems) Description type a description of the group Email type an email address for the new group On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To rename a group
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view/edit a group on page 77 and view the Properties screen for the group you want to rename. On the menu, click Rename. In the New Name field, type a new name for the group. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was renamed.
To add a member to a group

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view/edit a group on page 77 and view the Properties screen for the group you want to add a user or group to. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears. On the menu, click Add. The Add Member screen appears. Perform one of the following:
If Then
the member you want to add belongs to the domain you are currently in the member you want to add belongs to a different domain with an established trust to the current domain you want to search different domains with an established trust to the current domain for the member
enter the name of the member in the Name field, then select Add Member. enter the domain and name of the member in the
Name field in the format domain\name, then select Add Member.
enter the name of the member in the Name field and select Add Member. Select a domain from the list; a list of members matching your criteria in that domain is displayed. Select the member you want to add from the list, then select Add Member on the menu.
The Added member name to group name page opens.

Manag ing Microso ft Activ e Directo ry Managing groups
Select OK. The group name - Members page opens.
To remove a member from a group

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view/edit a group on page 77 and view the Properties screen for the group you remove a user or group from. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears. Scroll to the user or group that you want to remove from the group. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected user or group from the group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user or group was removed from the group.
To create a new group email address

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view/edit a group on page 77 and view the Properties screen for the group you want to create an email address for. On the menu, click Exchange Tasks. The Exchange screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click Establish E-mail Addresses. The Establish E-mail screen for the selected group appears. Complete the following fields: Alias type an email alias for the email address Associated Administrative Group select the administrative group that you want the email address to belong to On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the email address was created successfully.
To add a group email address

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view/edit a group on page 77 and view the Properties screen of the group that you want to add a group email address to. On the menu, click Exchange Tasks. The Exchange screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click E-mail Addresses. The E-mail Addresses screen for the selected group appears and displays the current list of email addresses for the group. On the menu, click New. The Internet Address Properties screen appears. In the E-mail field, type the email address that you want to add for the group. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new email address was added.
4 5 6
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
79
Manag ing Microso ft Act ive Direct ory Managing groups
To set a primary group email address

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view/edit a group on page 77 and view the Properties screen of the group that you want to set a primary email address for. On the menu, click Exchange Tasks. The Exchange screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click E-mail Addresses. The E-mail Addresses screen for the selected group appears and displays the current list of email addresses for the group. Scroll to the email address that you want to set as the groups primary address. On the menu, click Set As Primary. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the selected email address was set as the groups primary address.
To delete a group email address

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view/edit a group on page 77 and view the Properties screen of the group that you want to delete an email address for. On the menu, click Exchange Tasks. The Exchange screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click E-mail Addresses. The E-mail Addresses screen for the selected group appears and displays the current list of email addresses for the group. Scroll to the email address that you want to delete. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected email address. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the email address was deleted.
4 5
To delete a group
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Navigate to the folder that contains the group that you want to delete. Scroll to the group that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was deleted.
2 3 4
To create an organizational unit

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Navigate to the folder where you want to create a new organizational unit. On the menu, click New Organizational Unit. The New Organizational Unit screen appears.
2 3
80
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Activ e Directo ry Managing computers
4 5
In the Name field, type a name for the new organizational unit. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new organizational unit was created successfully.
Managing computers
You can manage computers with Mobile Admin for the Active Directory server you have selected. To view computers
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Scroll to the Computers folder. On the menu, click Select. The Computers screen appears and displays a list of users. To view information about a specific computer, scroll to the computer name. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected computer appears.
2 3
To add a computer
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Select New Computer from the menu. The New Computer page opens. Fill in the Computer Name and Computer Name pre2k fields, and check the Assign backup dc and Managed Computer check boxes if appropriate, then select Save on the menu. The Computer Added page opens
2 3
Note
If you checked the Managed Computer check-box, you will be prompted to enter the 32digit hexadecimal Computer GUID in the format xxxxxxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx. You will also be given the Any Remote Installation Server option. Select OK. Mobile Admin displays a message confirming that the computer was added.
To delete a computer
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view computers on page 81 and select the computer that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected computer. Click Yes.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Act ive Direct ory Managing computers
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the computer was deleted.
82
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Ex chan ge 2000 /2003 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Browsing the Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 tree
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 server to manage from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers list, or accessed Exchange 2000/2003 from the Mobile Admin Manage Services list. Mobile Admin supports the management of Microsoft Exchange 2007. See Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only).for more information.
Browsing the Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 tree

You can browse the Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 tree in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To browse the Exchange 2000/2003 tree From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Exchange System Manager icon. The Exchange screen appears, and displays a list of Exchange folders.
Managing Exchange 2000/2003 mailboxes

You can manage Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 mailboxes with Mobile Admin for the Active Directory server you have selected. To view a user mailbox
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Active Directory icon. The Active Directory screen appears, and displays a list of Active Directory folders. Navigate to the location of the user whose mailbox you want to view, and scroll to the user name. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears and displays a list of users. To view details about a specific user, scroll to the user name. On the menu, click Select.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
83
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 000/2003 ( Mob ile Adm in Pro fessio nal Only ) Managing Exchange 2000/2003 mailboxes
The Properties screen for the selected user appears.

4
On the menu, click Exchange Tasks. The Exchange screen for the selected user appears and displays details about the users mailbox.
To create a mailbox Use this procedure to create a user mailbox for a user that does not yet have a mailbox.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user mailbox on page 83. On the menu, click Create Mailbox. The Create Mailbox screen appears. Complete the following fields as required: Alias type an email alias for the email address Mailbox Store type the location of the mailbox store that the user will belong to On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the mailbox was created.
To move a mailbox
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Follow the procedure To view a user mailbox on page 83 and view the mailbox that you want to move. On the menu, click Exchange Tasks. The Exchange screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Move Mailbox... The Move Mailbox screen appears. Scroll to the New mailbox store field. On the menu, click Change Option. A drop-down menu appears. On the drop-down menu, select where you want to move the mailbox to. On the main menu, click Move Mailbox... Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the mailbox was moved. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To delete a mailbox
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user mailbox on page 83 and view the mailbox that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete Mailbox. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected mailbox. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the mailbox was deleted.
To establish an email address

1 2
84
Follow the procedure To view a user mailbox on page 83 and view the user mailbox that you want to establish an email address for. On the menu, click Establish E-mail Addresses.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Ex chan ge 2000 /2003 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing Exchange 2000/2003 mailboxes
The Establish E-mail screen for the selected user appears.

3
Complete the following fields: Alias type an email alias for the email address External E-mail Address type the email address that must be entered to send an email to the user from outside of the network Associated Administrative Group select the administrative group for the address On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the email address was created successfully.
To delete an email address

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a user mailbox on page 83 and view the user mailbox that you want to remove an email address from. On the menu, click E-mail Addresses. The E-mail Addresses screen for the selected user appears. Scroll to the email address that you want to remove. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected email address. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the selected email address was deleted.
To set a primary email address for a user

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view the user mailbox that you want to set a primary email address for. On the menu, click E-mail Addresses. The E-mail Addresses screen for the selected user appears. Scroll to the email address that you want to set as the users primary address. On the menu, click Set As Primary. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the selected email address was set as the users primary address.
To change mailbox delivery restrictions

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view the user mailbox that you want to edit delivery restrictions for. On the menu, click Delivery Restrictions. The Delivery Restrictions screen for the selected user appears. Complete the following fields as required. If you leave these blank, the system will use the default delivery restrictions from the mailbox store. Send Maximum KB type the maximum size, in KB, for messages being sent by the user Receive Maximum KB type the maximum size, in KB, for messages being received by the user On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the mailbox delivery restrictions were saved.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
85
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 000/2003 ( Mob ile Adm in Pro fessio nal Only ) Managing mailbox stores
To change forwarding address settings

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user mailbox on page 83 and view the user mailbox that you want to change forwarding address settings for. On the menu, click Delivery Options. The Delivery Options screen for the selected user appears. Complete the following fields as required: Forward To type the email address that you want to forward the users email to Deliver messages to both forwarding address and mailbox select this check box to deliver email messages to both the forwarding address and the mailbox. If you do not select it, email messages will only be sent to the forwarding address. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the forwarding address information was saved.
To change mailbox storage limits

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a user on page 74 and view the user mailbox that you want to edit storage limits for. On the menu, click Storage Limits. The Storage Limits screen for the selected user appears. Complete the following fields, as required: Use Mailbox Store Defaults select this check box to use the mailbox storage settings of the mailbox store Issue Warning at (KB) if you are not using the mailbox store defaults, type the size of the mailbox storage in KB at which you want to send a warning. Prohibit Send at (KB) if you are not using the mailbox store defaults, type the size of the mailbox storage in KB at which you want to prohibit the user from sending emails Prohibit Send and Receive at (KB) if you are not using the mailbox store defaults, type the size of the mailbox storage in KB at which you want to prohibit the user from sending and receiving emails On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the mailbox storage limits were saved.
Managing mailbox stores

You can manage mailbox stores for Microsoft Exchange with Mobile Admin.
Note
For information about managing Microsoft Exchange mailboxes, see Managing Exchange 2000/2003 mailboxes on page 83.
To change default delivery settings

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Exchange System Manager icon. The Exchange screen appears, and displays a list of Exchange folders. Scroll to the Global Settings icon. On the menu, click Select.
86
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Ex chan ge 2000 /2003 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing mailbox stores
The Global Settings screen appears.

3 4
Scroll to the message delivery icon. On the menu, click Select. The Message Delivery screen appears. Complete the following fields as required: Outgoing Maximum Size (KB) type the maximum size of an outgoing email message in KB Incoming Maximum Size (KB) type the maximum size of an incoming email message in KB Maximum Recipients type the maximum number of recipients for a single email message On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the settings were saved.
To mount or dismount a message store

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Exchange System Manager icon. The Exchange screen appears, and displays a list of Exchange folders. Scroll to the Administrative Groups icon. On the menu, click Select. The Administrative Groups screen appears. Scroll to the group that you want to mount or dismount a message store for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears. Scroll to the Servers icon. On the menu, click Select. The Servers screen appears. Scroll to the server that you want to mount or dismount a message store for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected server appears. Scroll to the Storage Group icon that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected storage group appears. Scroll to the message store that you want to mount or dismount. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected message store appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
2 3
4 5
6 7
you want to mount a dismounted message store you want to dismount a mounted message store
on the menu, click Mount. on the menu, click Dismount.
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message store was mounted or dismounted. To view or change mailbox store properties
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Exchange System Manager icon. The Exchange screen appears, and displays a list of Exchange folders. Scroll to the Administrative Groups icon. On the menu, click Select.
2
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 000/2003 ( Mob ile Adm in Pro fessio nal Only ) Managing mailbox stores
The Administrative Groups screen appears.

3
Scroll to the group that contains the message store you want to view or edit properties for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears. Scroll to the Servers icon. On the menu, click Select. The Servers screen appears. Scroll to the server that contains the message store you want to view or edit properties for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected server appears. Scroll to the Storage Group icon that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected storage group appears. Scroll to the message store that you want to mount or dismount. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected message store appears. On the menu, click Properties. The Properties screen for the selected store appears. To edit the message store properties, change the following fields, as required: Issue Warning at (KB) type the size, in KB, that the mailbox store must reach to trigger a warning Prohibit Send at (KB) type the size, in KB, that the mailbox store must reach before Microsoft Exchange prohibits sending messages Prohibit Send and Receive at (KB) type the size, in KB, that the mailbox store must reach before Microsoft Exchange prohibits sending and receiving messages Keep Deleted Items for (days) type the number of days that Microsoft Exchange will keep deleted items for Keep Deleted Mailboxes for (days) type the number of days that Microsoft Exchange will keep deleted mailboxes for On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
4 5
6 7
8 9
10
To find or view details for a mailbox Use this procedure to view information about a specific mailbox, such as current size, last logon information
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Exchange System Manager icon. The Exchange screen appears, and displays a list of Exchange folders. Scroll to the Administrative Groups icon. On the menu, click Select. The Administrative Groups screen appears. Scroll to the group that you want to search. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears. Scroll to the Servers icon. On the menu, click Select. The Servers screen appears. Scroll to the server that you want to search. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected server appears.
2 3 4 5
88
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Ex chan ge 2000 /2003 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing message queues
6 7 8 9 10
Scroll to the Storage Group icon that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected storage group appears. Scroll to the message store that you want to search. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected message store appears and displays a list of mailbox stores. Scroll to Mailboxes. On the menu, click Select. The Mailbox Store screen appears. Scroll to Mailboxes. On the menu, click Select. The Mailbox Store screen displays the mailboxes in the selected mailbox store. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want to search for a specific mailbox
On the menu, click Find. The Find Mailbox screen appears. In the Mailbox name field, type a search string for the mailbox you want to find. On the menu, click Find. Scroll to the mailbox you want to view. On the menu, click Select.
you want to select the mailbox from the list
Mobile Admin displays a list of mailboxes that match the search string.
Managing message queues

You can manage message queues for Microsoft Exchange with Mobile Admin. To view a message queue
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Exchange System Manager icon. The Exchange screen appears, and displays a list of Exchange folders. Scroll to the Administrative Groups icon. On the menu, click Select. The Administrative Groups screen appears. Scroll to the group that you want to view message queues for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears. Scroll to the Servers icon. On the menu, click Select. The Servers screen appears. Scroll to the server that you want to view message queues for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected server appears. Scroll to the Queues icon. On the menu, click Select. The Queues screen appears. Scroll to the queue that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected queue appears.
2 3 4 5 6 7
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
89
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 000/2003 ( Mob ile Adm in Pro fessio nal Only ) Managing message queues
To freeze a message queue

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 and view details for the message queue that you want to freeze. On the menu, click Freeze. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the queue was frozen.
To unfreeze a frozen message queue

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 to view details for the message queue that you want to unfreeze. On the menu, click Unfreeze. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the queue was unfrozen.
To force a connection queue

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 and view details for the message queue that you want to force a connection for. On the menu, click Force Connection. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the connection was forced.
To delete all messages in a queue with or without an NDR

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 and view details for the message queue that you want to delete messages from. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want to delete all messages in the queue without sending non-delivery reports (NDR) to the senders you want to delete all messages in the queue and send non-delivery reports (NDR) to the senders
on the menu, click Delete All Messages (no NDR). on the menu, click Delete All Messages (with NDR).
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected message.
3
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message was deleted.
To enumerate messages
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 and view details for the message queue that you want to enumerate messages for. On the menu, click Enumerate Messages. The screen for the selected queue appears and displays the messages in the queue.
To freeze a single message in a queue

1 2
90
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 and view details for the message queue that contains the message you want to freeze. On the menu, click Enumerate Messages.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Ex chan ge 2000 /2003 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing message queues
The screen for the selected queue appears and displays the messages in the queue.
3
On the menu, click Freeze. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message was frozen.
To unfreeze a frozen message in a queue

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 and view details for the message queue that contains the message you want to unfreeze. On the menu, click Enumerate Messages. The screen for the selected queue appears and displays the messages in the queue. On the menu, click Unfreeze. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message was unfrozen.
To delete a single message in a queue with or without an NDR

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a message queue on page 89 and view details for the message queue that you want to enumerate messages for. On the menu, click Enumerate Messages. The screen for the selected queue appears and displays the messages in the queue. Scroll to the message that you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected message appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want to delete the message without sending a non-delivery report (NDR) to the sender you want to delete the message and send a nondelivery report (NDR) to the sender
on the menu, click Delete (no NDR). on the menu, click Delete (with NDR).
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected message.
5
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message was deleted.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
91
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 000/2003 ( Mob ile Adm in Pro fessio nal Only ) Managing message queues
92
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) About Microsoft Exchange 2007 for Mobile Admin
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Exchange 2007 servers.
Note
If Mobile Admin has been installed on a 32-bit operating system, then the 32-bit version of the Exchange Management Tools needs to be installed.
About Microsoft Exchange 2007 for Mobile Admin

Mobile Admin allows you to manage Microsoft Exchange 2007 from your wireless device. To access the Microsoft Exchange 2007 interface Follow this procedure in order to access the Microsoft Exchange 2007 interface. From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, select Exchange Management Console. The Exchange Management Console screen is displayed. The Exchange Management Console for Mobile Admin is composed of four sections: Organization Configuration Server Configuration Recipient Configuration Toolbox
Organization Configuration
The Organization Configuration section is where Exchange 2007 administrator types and global transport settings are managed. Tasks performed from the Organization Configuration section are: managing administrators managing global limits on messages
To access the Organization Configuration section Follow this procedure in order to access the Organization Configuration section of the Microsoft Exchange 2007 interface. From the Exchange Management Console interface, select Organization Configuration.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
93
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 007 (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Organization Configuration
The Organization Configuration screen opens. The Organization Configuration interface is composed of two sections: Exchange Administrators Hub Transport
Exchange Administrators The Exchange Administrators section is where Microsoft Exchange 2007 administrators are managed. You can view the list of administrators (as well as administrator-specific information, such as identity, role, and scope), and add/remove administrators from this section. To view the list of administrators Follow this procedure in order to view the list of Microsoft Exchange 2007 administrators.
1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Organization Configuration section on page 93. Select Exchange Administrators. The Exchange Administrators screen opens, displaying the list of Exchange administrators.
.To view administrator-specific information Follow this procedure in order to view the identity, role, and scope of an administrator.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of administrators on page 94. Select the name of the administrator whose information you want to view. The Exchange Admin [Administrator Name] screen opens, displaying the identity, role, and scope of the selected administrator.
To add an administrator Follow this procedure in order to add a user/group as a Microsoft Exchange 2007 administrator.
Note
To can only add an existing Active Directory user or group to the Microsoft Exchange 2007 administrator list. To create an Active Directory user or group, see To create a user on page 73 or To create a group on page 77. Follow the procedure To view the list of administrators on page 94. Select Add Admin from the menu. The Delegate a User or Group screen opens. Perform one of the following: a Select User if you want to add an individual user as an administrator. b Select Group if you want to add all members of a group as administrators. The In which OU is the User/Group to delegate? screen opens. Select the organizational unit containing the user/group you want to add. The Select User/Group to Delegate screen opens. Select the user/group you want to add. The Select Administrator Role and Scope screen opens.
1 2 3
4 5
94
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Organization Configuration
6 7 8
Assign Role and Scope by clicking on the menu button and selecting options from the lists. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Added [Username and information] dialog box appears. Select OK. The Exchange Administrators screen opens displaying the updated list of administrators.
To remove an administrator Follow this procedure in order to remove an Active Directory user from the Microsoft Exchange 2007 Administrator list.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view the list of administrators on page 94. Select the name of the administrator you want to remove. The Exchange Admin [Username] screen opens. Click the menu button, and select Remove. The Are you sure you want to remove Exchange Administrator? dialog box appears. Select Yes. The Removed [Username and information] from Exchange Administrators dialog box appears. Select OK. The Exchange Administrators screen opens displaying the updated list of administrators. Hub Transport The Hub Transport section is where Exchange 2007 global transport settings are managed. You can manage maximum message send and receive size, and maximum number of message recipients from this section.
To view transport settings Follow this procedure in order to view Exchange 2007 transport settings.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the Organization Configuration section on page 93. Select Hub Transport. The Hub Transport screen opens. Select Global Settings. The Global Settings screen opens. Select Transport Settings. The Transport Settings Properties screen opens displaying transport settings.
To set maximum send size Follow this procedure in order to set the maximum send size for emails.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view transport settings on page 95. In the Max. send size (KB) field, enter the maximum send size you want applied to emails in your organization. To set an unlimited value, leave the field blank.
Note
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
95
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 007 (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Server Configuration
3 4
Click the menu button, and select Save. The Saved Global Transport Settings dialog box appears. Select OK. The Transport Settings Properties screen opens displaying the updated transport settings.
To set maximum receive size Follow this procedure in order to set maximum receive size for emails.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view transport settings on page 95. In the Max. receive size (KB) field, enter the maximum receive size you want applied to emails in your organization. To set an unlimited value, leave the field blank. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Saved Global Transport Settings dialog box appears. Select OK. The Transport Settings Properties screen opens displaying the updated transport settings.
Note
3 4
To set maximum number of recipients Follow this procedure in order to set the maximum number of recipients for emails.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view transport settings on page 95. In the Max. # of recipients field, enter the maximum number of recipients you want applied to emails in your organization. To set an unlimited value, leave the field blank. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Saved Global Transport Settings dialog box appears. Select OK. The Transport Settings Properties screen opens displaying the updated transport settings.
Note
3 4
Server Configuration
The Server Configuration section is where Microsoft Exchange 2007 databases are managed. Tasks performed in the Server Configuration section include: viewing of mailbox databases and public folder databases mounting/dismounting of databases managing database settings (issue warning at, prohibit send at, prohibit send and receive at, keep deleted items for, keep deleted mailbox for)
To access the Server Configuration section Follow this procedure in order to access the Server Configuration section of the Microsoft Exchange 2007 interface.
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Server Configuration
From the Exchange Management Console interface, select Server Configuration. The Server Configuration screen opens. Mailbox The Mailbox section is where mailbox and public folder databases are managed. You can view mailbox and public folder databases (as well as database properties), mount and dismount databases, and manage database settings from this section.
To view a mailbox/public folder database Follow this procedure in order to view a mailbox or public folder database.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To access the Server Configuration section on page 96. Select Mailbox. The Mailbox Servers screen opens displaying the mailbox server list. Select the server in which the mailbox or public folder database you want to view is contained from the list. The [Server Name] Storage Groups screen opens displaying the list of storage groups for the server you have selected. Select the storage group from the list in which the mailbox or public folder database you want to view is contained. The [Server name] Database Management screen opens displaying the mailbox or public folder database/s contained within that storage group.
To view mailbox/public folder database properties Follow this procedure in order to view mailbox or public folder database properties.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a mailbox/public folder database on page 97. Select the mailbox or public folder database from the list whose database properties you want to view. The [Mailbox/Public Folder] Properties screen opens displaying the mailbox or public folder database properties.
To manage database settings Follow this procedure in order to manage database settings.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view mailbox/public folder database properties on page 97. Scroll to the text field of the setting you want to change, and enter the new value. The settings that you can change are: Issue warning at (KB) Prohibit send at (KB) Prohibit send and receive at (KB) Keep deleted items for (days) Keep deleted mailbox for (days) To set an unlimited value, leave the field blank. Click the menu button, and select Refresh.
Note
3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
97
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 007 (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Recipient Configuration
The [Mailbox/Public Folder] screen opens displaying updated database settings. To mount a database Follow this procedure in order to mount a database.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view mailbox/public folder database properties on page 97. Scroll to the Status text field, and click the menu button. Select Mount. The Mounted Database dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mailbox/Public Folder] screen opens displaying the updated database properties.
To dismount a database Follow this procedure in order to dismount a database.

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view mailbox/public folder database properties on page 97. Scroll to the Status text field, and click the menu button. Select Dismount. The Dismounted Database dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mailbox/Public Folder] screen opens displaying updated database properties.
Recipient Configuration
The Recipient Configuration section is where mailboxes, distribution groups, mail contacts and disconnected mailboxes are managed. Tasks performed in the Recipient Configuration section include: viewing of organization-wide recipient types (mailboxes, distribution groups, mail contacts, and disconnected mailboxes) adding, deleting, and disabling mailboxes searching the organization to find mailboxes managing mailbox settings (issue warning at, prohibit send at, prohibit send and receive at, keep deleted items for) managing mailbox features (Outlook Web Access, ActiveSync, MAPI, POP, etc.) managing mail flow settings (forwarding address; maximum recipients, send size and receive size) managing email addresses associated with a mailbox enabling/disabling of organization email address policy setting email addresses as default reply addresses setting mail contacts email addresses as default external addresses moving mailboxes to a different mailbox databases re-connecting mailboxes
98
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Recipient Configuration
To access the Recipient Configuration section Follow this procedure in order to access the Recipient Configuration section of the Microsoft Exchange 2007 interface. From the Exchange Management Console interface, select Recipient Configuration. The Recipient Configuration screen opens. The Recipient Configuration interface is composed of seven sections: Mailbox (All) Mailbox (Filtered) Distribution Group (All) Distribution Group (Filtered) Mail Contact (All) Mail Contact (Filtered) Disconnected Mailbox
Mailbox (All) The Mailbox (All) section is where mailboxes are managed. You can view the list of mailboxes and mailbox-specific information, manage mailbox settings and features, move mailboxes, manage mail flow settings and email addresses, create mailbox filters and add, remove or disable mailboxes and in this section. To view the list of mailboxes Follow this procedure in order to view the list of mailboxes.
1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Recipient Configuration section on page 99. Select Mailbox (All). The Mailbox screen opens displaying the list of mailboxes
To view mailbox properties Follow this procedure in order to view mailbox properties.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of mailboxes on page 99. Select the mailbox for which you want to view properties. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - General screen opens displaying mailbox properties.
To manage mailbox properties Follow this procedure in order to manage mailbox properties.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Scroll to the text field of the setting you want to change, and enter the new value. The settings that you can change are: Display name Alias Click the menu button, and select Refresh. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - General screen opens displaying updated mailbox properties.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
99
To hide a mailbox from Exchange address lists Follow this procedure in order to hide a mailbox from Exchange address lists.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Scroll to the Hide from Exchange address lists check box. Click the trackball to select the check box. Click the menu button, and select Refresh. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - General screen opens displaying updated mailbox properties.
To manage mailbox settings Follow this procedure in order to manage mailbox settings.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Click the menu button, and select Mailbox Settings. The [Mailbox Name] screen opens. Perform one or both of the following: a Scroll to the Use mailbox database storage defaults or Use mailbox database deletion defaults check box, click the menu button and select Change Option to select/deselect the check box. For more information on managing database default settings, see To manage database settings on page 97.
b
Note
Enter the values you want to change in the Issue warning at (KB) and Keep deleted items for (days) text fields.
Note
4 5
To set an unlimited value, leave the field blank. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Saved Settings dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mailbox name] screen opens displaying the updated mailbox settings.
To manage mailbox features Follow this procedure in order to manage mailbox features.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Click the menu button, and select Mailbox Features. The [Mailbox name] Properties - Mailbox Features page opens. Scroll to the feature you want to change with the trackball, and click the menu button. Select Change Option to select/deselect the check box of the feature you want to change. Click the menu button, and select Refresh. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - Mailbox Features screen opens displaying updated mailbox features.
100
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To move a mailbox Follow this procedure in order to move a mailbox from one mailbox database to another.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Click the menu button, and select Move Mailbox... The Move Recipient [Mailbox Name] screen opens. Click the menu button, and select Change Option. A list of mailbox databases will appear in the Target database field. Select the mailbox database to which you want to move the mailbox. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Moved [mailbox] to [mailbox database] dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - General screen opens displaying the updated mailbox properties.
To manage mail flow settings Follow this procedure in order to manage mail flow settings.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Click the menu button, and select Mail Flow Settings. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - Mail Flow Settings screen opens. Perform one or both of the following: a Scroll to the Deliver message to both forwarding address and mailbox check box, click the menu button, and select Change Option to select/deselect the check box. b Enter the values you want in the Max. recipients, Max. send size (KB), and Max. receive size (KB) text fields. To set an unlimited value, leave the field blank. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Saved Settings dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - Mail Flow Settings screen opens displaying the updated mail flow settings.
Note
4 5
To manage a mailboxs email addresses Follow this procedure in order to view a mailboxs email addresses.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Click the menu button, and select E-Mail Addresses. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying a list of email addresses associated with that mailbox. Click the menu button, and perform any or all of the following: a Select Enable/Disable Email Address Policy to enable or disable the email address policy. b Select Set As Reply to set the email address as that mailboxs reply address.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
101
Select Remove Email to remove the email address from that mailbox. Select Add Email to add an email address to the mailbox. A dialog box appears.
c d 4 5
Select OK. Click the menu button and select Save. The [Mailbox Name] Properties - E-mail Addresses screen opens displaying the updated email addresses.
To remove or disable a mailbox Follow this procedure in order to disable a mailbox or remove a mailbox from the mailbox database.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view mailbox properties on page 99. Click the menu button, and perform one of the following: a To disable a mailbox, select Disable. b To remove a mailbox from the database, select Remove. A dialog box appears. Select Yes. The Mailbox screen opens displaying a list of updated mailboxes.
To create a mailbox filter Follow this procedure in order to create a mailbox filter.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view the list of mailboxes on page 99. Click the menu button, and select Create Filter. The Mailbox Filter screen opens. Fill in the text fields with the required information. Click the menu button, and select Apply Filter. The Mailbox **Filtered** screen opens displaying the filtered list of mailboxes.
To add a mailbox Follow this procedure in order to add a mailbox.

Note
To can only add a mailbox to the Microsoft Exchange 2007 mailbox list for an existing Active Directory user or group. To create an Active Directory user or group, see To create a user on page 73 orTo create a group on page 77. Follow the procedure To view the list of mailboxes on page 99. Click the menu button, and select New Mailbox... The In which OU is the object for the new Mailbox located? screen opens. Scroll to the organizational unit in which the object for the new mailbox is located, click the menu button, and select Select. The Select Object for New Mailbox screen opens. Scroll to the object you want, click the menu button, and select Select. The New Mailbox screen opens.
1 2 3
102
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
5 6
Fill in the text fields with the required information, click the menu button and select Save. The added [Mailbox Name] to Mailbox list dialog box appears. Select OK. The Mailbox screen opens displaying the updated list of mailboxes. Mailbox (Filtered) The Mailbox (Filtered) section provides a shortcut to the Create Filter option found in the Mailbox (All) section. This option is useful when working with large numbers of mailboxes, as it allows the user to access specific mailboxes without having to wait for the entire mailbox list to populate.
To create a mailbox filter (shortcut method) Follow this procedure in order to create a mailbox filter.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the Recipient Configuration section on page 99. Select Mailbox (Filtered). The Mailbox Filter screen opens. Fill in the text fields with the required information. Click the menu button, and select Apply Filter. The Mailbox **Filtered** screen opens displaying the filtered list of mailboxes. Distribution Group (All) The Distribution Group (All) section is where Microsoft Exchange 2007 distribution groups are managed. You can view the list of distribution groups (as well as distribution group properties), view distribution group members, manage mailflow settings and email addresses, create distribution group filters, and add, disable and remove distribution groups from this section.
To view the list of distribution groups Follow this procedure in order to view the list of distribution groups.
1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Recipient Configuration section on page 99. Select Distribution Group. The Distribution Group screen opens displaying the list of mailboxes.
To create a distribution group filter Follow this procedure in order to create a distribution group filter.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view the list of distribution groups on page 103. Click the menu button and select Create Filter. The Distribution Group Filter screen opens. Fill in the text fields with the required information. Click the menu button, and select Apply Filter. The Distribution Group **Filtered** screen opens displaying the filtered list of distribution groups.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
103
To create a new distribution group Follow this procedure in order to create a new distribution group.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view the list of distribution groups on page 103. Click the menu button and select New Distribution Group.... The In which OU is the object for the new Distribution Group located? screen opens. Scroll to the organizational unit in which the object for the new distribution group is located, click the menu button, and select Select. The Select Object for New Distribution Group screen opens. Scroll to the object you want, click the menu button, and select Select. The New Distribution Group screen opens. Enter an alias in the Alias field, click the menu button and select Save. The added [Distribution Group Name] to Distribution Group list dialog box appears. Select OK. The Distribution Group screen opens displaying the updated list of distribution groups.
4 5 6
To view distribution group properties Follow this procedure in order to view distribution group properties.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of distribution groups on page 103. Select the distribution group for which you want to view properties. The [Distribution Group Name] Properties - General screen opens displaying distribution groupspecific information.
To manage distribution group properties Follow this procedure in order to manage distribution group properties.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view distribution group properties on page 104. Scroll to the text field of the setting you want to change, and enter the new value. The settings that you can change are: Display name Alias Click the menu button, and select Refresh. The [Distribution Group Name] Properties - General screen opens displaying updated distribution group-specific information.
To view distribution group members Follow this procedure in order to view the members of a distribution group.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view distribution group properties on page 104. Click the menu button, and select Members. The [Distribution Group Name] Properties - Members screen opens displaying a list of distribution group member names.
To manage distribution group mail flow settings Follow this procedure in order to manage mail flow settings for a distribution group.
104
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view distribution group properties on page 104. Click the menu button, and select Mail Flow Settings. The [Distribution Group Name] Properties - Mail Flow Settings screen opens. Enter the value you want in the Max. receive size (KB) text field. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Saved Settings dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Distribution Group] screen opens displaying updated mail flow settings.
To view a distribution groups email address Follow this procedure in order to view email addresses for a distribution group.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view distribution group properties on page 104. Click the menu button, and select E-Mail Addresses. The [Distribution Group] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying the distribution groups email address/es.
To edit a distribution groups email address Follow this procedure in order to edit a distribution groups email address/es.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a distribution groups email address on page 105. Select the email address that you want to edit. The Edit E-Mail Address screen opens. In the E-Mail address text field, and enter the modifications to the email address. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Changed [original email address] to [modified email address] dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Distribution Group] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying updated email addresses.
To enable/disable the email address policy for a distribution group Follow this procedure in order to enable or disable the email address policy.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a distribution groups email address on page 105. Click the menu button, and select Enable/Disable Email Address Policy. The Enabled/Disabled E-Mail Address Policy dialog box appears. A dialog box will appear if you do not have the administration privileges required to enable/disable the email address policy. Select OK. The [Distribution Group] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens.
Note
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
105
To set a reply email address for a distribution group Follow this procedure in order to set an alternate email address as the reply address for a distribution group.
Note
If you only have one email address associated with the distribution group, it is automatically set as the reply address. Follow the procedure To view a distribution groups email address on page 105. On the [Distribution Group] - E-Mail Addresses screen, all email addresses are prefixed either by smtp or SMTP. The email address prefixed with SMTP indicates the current reply address. Scroll to the email address you want to set as the reply address, click the menu button, and select Set As Reply. The E-Mail Address dialog box will appear. Select OK. The [Distribution Group] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens.
Note
To remove an email address from a distribution group Follow this procedure in order to remove an email address from a distribution group.
1
Follow the procedure To view a distribution groups email address on page 105. You cannot remove an email address if it is the only email address for a distribution group, or if it is the reply address. If you want to remove is the current reply address, you must set another email address as the reply address beforehand. Scroll to the email address you want to remove, click the menu button, and select Remove
Email.
Note
The Are you sure you want to remove this e-mail address? dialog box appears.
3 4
Select Yes. The Removed E-Mail address dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Distribution Group] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying the updated list of email addresses.
To add an email address to a distribution group Follow this procedure in order to add an email address to a distribution group.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a distribution groups email address on page 105. Click the menu button, and select Add Email. The New E-Mail Address screen opens. Delete the placeholder email address and enter the new email address in the E-Mail
address field.
Click the menu button, and select Save. The Added E-Mail Address dialog bog appears.
106
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Select OK. The [Distribution Group] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying the updated list of email addresses.
To disable a distribution group Follow this procedure in order to disable a distribution group.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view distribution group properties on page 104. Click the menu button, and select Disable. A dialog box appears explaining that disabling the distribution group will mark it for removal in the database. Select Yes. The Disabled [Distribution Group] dialog box appears. Select OK. The Distribution Group screen opens displaying the updated list of distribution groups. Distribution Group (Filtered) The Distribution Group (Filtered) section provides a shortcut to the Create Filter option found in the Distribution Group (All) section. This option is useful when working with large numbers of distribution groups, as it allows the user to access specific distribution groups without having to wait for the entire distribution group list to populate.
3 4
To create a distribution group filter (shortcut method) Follow this procedure in order to create a distribution group filter.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the Recipient Configuration section on page 99. Select Distribution Group (Filtered). The Distribution Group Filter screen opens. Fill in the text fields with the required information. Click the menu button, and select Apply Filter. The Distribution Group **Filtered** screen opens displaying the filtered list. Mail Contact (All) The Mail Contact section is where Microsoft Exchange 2007 mail contacts are managed. You can view the list of mail contacts (as well as mail contact properties), manage mail contact mailflow settings and email addresses, create mail contact filters, and add, disable and remove mail contacts from this section.
To view the list of mail contacts Follow this procedure in order to view the list of mail contacts.
1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Recipient Configuration section on page 99. Select Mail Contact (All). The Mail Contact screen opens displaying the list of mail contacts.
To create a mail contact filter Follow this procedure in order to create a mail contact filter.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1 Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide 107
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view the list of mail contacts on page 107. Click the menu button and select Create Filter. The Mail Contact Filter screen opens. Fill in the text fields with the required information. Click the menu button, and select Apply Filter. The Mail Contact **Filtered** screen opens displaying the filtered list of mail contacts.
To create a new mail contact Follow this procedure in order to create a new mail contact.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view the list of mail contacts on page 107. Click the menu button and select New Mail Contact.... The In which OU is the object for the new Mail Contact located? screen opens. Scroll to the organizational unit in which the object for the new mail contact is located, click the menu button, and select Select. The Select Object for New Mail Contact screen opens. Scroll to the object you want, click the menu button, and select Select. The New Mail Contact screen opens. In the Email address field, enter the email address of the mail contact, then in the Alias field, enter an alias for the mail contact. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Added [Mail Contact] to Mail Contact list dialog box appears. Select OK. The Mail Contact screen opens displaying an updated list of mail contacts.
4 5 6 7
To view mail contact properties Follow this procedure in order to view mail contact properties.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view the list of mail contacts on page 107. Select the mail contact for whom you want to view properties. The [Mail Contact] Properties - General screen opens displaying mail contact-specific information.
To manage mail contact properties Follow this procedure in order to manage mail contact properties.
1 2
Follow the procedure. Perform one or both of the following: a Scroll to the text field of the setting you want to change, and enter the new value. The settings that you can change are: Display name Alias b Click in the Hide from Exchange address lists check box to select/deselect it. Click the menu button, and select Refresh.
108
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The [Mail Contact] Properties - General screen opens displaying updated distribution groupspecific information. To manage mail contact mail flow settings Follow this procedure in order to manage mail flow settings for a mail contact.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view mail contact properties on page 108. Click the menu button, and select Mail Flow Settings. The [Mail Contact] Properties - Mail Flow Settings screen opens. Enter the value you want in the Max. receive size (KB) text field. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Saved Settings dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mail Contact] screen opens displaying updated mail flow settings.
To view a mail contacts email address Follow this procedure in order to view email addresses for a mail contact.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view mail contact properties on page 108. Click the menu button, and select E-Mail Addresses. The [Mail Contact] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying the mail contacts email address/es.
To edit a mail contacts email address Follow this procedure in order to edit a mail contacts email address/es.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a mail contacts email address on page 109. Select the email address that you want to edit. The Edit E-Mail Address screen opens. In the E-Mail address text field, and enter the modifications to the email address. Click the menu button, and select Save. The Changed [original email address] to [modified email address] dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mail Contact] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying updated email addresses.
To enable/disable the email address policy for a mail contact Follow this procedure in order to enable or disable the email address policy.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a mail contacts email address on page 109. Click the menu button, and select Enable/Disable Email Address Policy. The Enabled/Disabled E-Mail Address Policy dialog box appears. A dialog box will appear if you do not have the administration privileges required to enable/disable the email address policy. Select OK.
Note
3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The [Mail Contact] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens. To set a reply email address for a mail contact Follow this procedure in order to set an alternate email address as the reply address for a mail contact.
Note
If you only have one email address associated with a mail contact, it is automatically set as the reply address. Follow the procedure To view a mail contacts email address on page 109. On the [Mail Contact] - E-Mail Addresses screen, all email addresses are prefixed either by smtp or SMTP. The email address prefixed with SMTP indicates the current reply address. Scroll to the email address you want to set as the reply address, click the menu button, and select Set As Reply. The E-Mail Address dialog box will appear. Select OK. The [Mail Contact] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens.
Note
To remove an email address from a mail contact Follow this procedure in order to remove an email address from a mail contact.
1
Follow the procedure To view a mail contacts email address on page 109. You cannot remove an email address if it is the only email address for a mail contact, or if it is the reply address. If you want to remove is the current reply address, you must first set another email address as the reply address. Scroll to the email address you want to remove, click the menu button, and select Remove
Email.
Note
The Are you sure you want to remove this e-mail address? dialog box appears.
3 4
Select Yes. The Removed E-Mail address dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Mail Contact] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying the updated list of email addresses.
To add an email address to a mail contact Follow this procedure in order to add an email address to a mail contact.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a mail contacts email address on page 109. Click the menu button, and select Add Email. The New E-Mail Address screen opens. Delete the placeholder email address and enter the new email address in the E-Mail
address field.
110
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
4 5
Click the menu button, and select Save. The Added E-Mail Address dialog bog appears. Select OK. The [Mail Contact] Properties - E-Mail Addresses screen opens displaying the updated list of email addresses.
To disable a mail contact Follow this procedure in order to disable a mail contact.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view mail contact properties on page 108. Click the menu button, and select Disable. A dialog box appears explaining that disabling the distribution group will mark it for removal in the database. Select Yes. The Disabled [Mail Contact] dialog box appears. Select OK. The Mail Contact screen opens displaying the updated list of mail contacts. Mail Contact (Filtered) The Mail Contact (Filtered) section provides a shortcut to the Create Filter option found in the Mail Contact (All) section. This option is useful when working with large numbers of mail contacts, as it allows the user to access specific mail contacts without having to wait for the entire mail contact list to populate.
3 4
To create a mail contact filter (shortcut method) Follow this procedure in order to create a mail contact filter.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the Recipient Configuration section on page 99. Select Mail Contact (Filtered). The Mail Contact Filter screen opens. Fill in the text fields with the required information. Click the menu button, and select Apply Filter. The Mail Contact **Filtered** screen opens displaying the filtered list. Disconnected Mailbox The Disconnected Mailbox section is where disconnected Microsoft Exchange 2007 mailboxes are reconnected.
To reconnect a disconnected mailbox Follow this procedure in order to reconnect a disconnected mailbox.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To access the Recipient Configuration section on page 99. Select Disconnected Mailbox. The Select Mailbox to Reconnect screen opens displaying a list of disconnected mailboxes. Scroll to the mailbox you want to reconnect, and select it. The In which OU is the User that will connect to mailbox [Mailbox Name]? screen opens.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
111
Manag ing Microso ft Exchan ge 2 007 (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Toolbox
Scroll to the organizational unit in which the user you want to connect the mailbox to is housed, and select it. The Select User to Connect to [Mailbox name] opens. Scroll to the user to whom you want to connect the mailbox, and select it. The Select Mailbox Type for [Mailbox Name] screen opens. In the Mailbox type field, select the type of mailbox you want the user to have. Click the menu button, and select Connect. The Connected Mailbox dialog box appears. Select OK. The Select Mailbox to Reconnect screen opens displaying the updated list of disconnected mailboxes.
5 6 7 8
Toolbox
The Toolbox section is where Microsoft Exchange 2007 troubleshooting tasks are performed: testing services testing system health testing mail flow managing queue viewer
To access the Toolbox section Follow this procedure in order to access the Toolbox section of the Microsoft Exchange 2007 interface. From the Exchange Management Console interface, select Toolbox. The Toolbox screen opens. The Toolbox interface is composed of four sections: Test Services Test System Health Test Mail Flow Queue Viewer
Test Services The Test Services section is where services are tested to determine if necessary services for assigned server roles are running on a specific Exchange 2007 server. To view the list of Mircosoft Exchange 2007 servers Follow this procedure in order to view the list of Microsoft Exchange 2007 servers.
1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Toolbox section on page 112. Select Test Services. The Exchange Servers screen opens displaying the list of Microsoft Exchange 2007 servers.
112
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Toolbox
To test services Follow this procedure in order to test the services of a particular server.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of Mircosoft Exchange 2007 servers on page 112. Scroll to the server for which you want to test services, and select it. The [Server Name] Service Test Results screen opens displaying the results of the services test. Test System Health The Test System Health section is where system health is quickly scanned with the BPA to determine if the Exchange 2007 organization is configured properly.
To test system health Follow this procedure in order to test system health.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To access the Toolbox section on page 112. Select Test System Health. The Test System Health screen opens. Click the menu button and select Run Test. The System Health Results screen opens displaying the results of the system health test. Test Mail Flow The Test Mail Flow section is where mail flow is tested to locally troubleshoot mail flow between specific servers within the organization, or to remotely troubleshoot email addresses.
To locally test mail flow Follow this procedure in order to locally test mail flow.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the Toolbox section on page 112. Select Test Mail Flow. The Test Mail Flow screen opens. Select Local Test. The Test Mail Flow - Local screen opens. Perform the following: a In the Originating server field, select the server from where mail flow is initiated from the list. b In the Target server field, select the server to where mail flow is intended from the list. Click the menu button, and select Run Test. The Local Mail Flow Test Results screen opens, displaying the test results and latency speed.
To remotely test mail flow Follow this procedure in order to remotely test mail flow.
1 2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Follow the procedure To access the Toolbox section on page 112. Select Test Mail Flow. The Test Mail Flow screen opens. Select Remote Test.
The Test Mail Flow - Remote screen opens.

4
Perform the following: a In the Originating server field, select the server from where mail flow is initiated from the list. b In the Remote email address field, enter the email address to where mail flow is intended. Click the menu button, and select Run Test. The Remote Mail Flow Test Results screen opens, displaying the test results and latency speed. Queue Viewer The Queue Viewer section is where queues and queue details are viewed, suspended/resumed, and where messages are retrieved from within queues.
To view a queue Follow this procedure in order to view a queue.

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To access the Toolbox section on page 112. Select Queue Viewer. The Select Server where Queue Resides screen opens displaying a list of servers. Select the server wherein the queue resides. The [Server name] Queues screen opens displaying a list of queues displaying a list of queues within the selected server.
To view queue details Follow this procedure in order to view queue details.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a queue on page 114. Select the queue for which you want to view details. The [Server name] Queue Details screen opens displaying queue details.
To suspend a queue Follow this procedure in order to suspended a queue.

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view queue details on page 114. Click the menu button and select Suspend. The Suspended Queue [Queue Name] dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Queue Name] Queue Details screen opens displaying updated queue details.
To resume a queue Follow this procedure in order to resume a suspended queue.

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view queue details on page 114. Click the menu button and select Resume. The Resumed Queue [Queue Name] dialog box appears. Select OK.
114
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Toolbox
The [Queue Name] Queue Details screen opens displaying updated queue details. To retrieve a message from within a queue Follow this procedure in order to retrieve messages from within queues.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view queue details on page 114. Click the menu button and select Get Messages. The [Queue Name] Messages screen opens displaying a list of messages with the selected queue. Select the queue that you would like to retrieve. The [Queue Name] Message screen opens displaying queue details. Click the menu button and perform one of the following: a Select Suspend if you want to suspend the message in the queue. b Select Remove (with NDR) if you want to remove the message from the queue and send a non-deliverable response to the sender. c Select Remove (without NDR) if you want to remove the message from the queue without sending a non-deliverable response to the sender. A dialog box appears. Select OK. The [Queue Name] Messages screen opens displaying updated queue details.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
115
116
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing SQL Server instances
Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft SQL Servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a Microsoft SQL Server to manage from your server list.
Managing SQL Server instances

You can manage SQL Server instances with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. To view instances From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances.
To authenticate your credentials for the SQL server

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. If your Windows authentication (user name and password) are valid for the selected SQL instance, the screen for the selected instance appears. If your Windows authentication is not valid for the SQL instance, the SQL Server Login screen appears. To access the SQL Server Login screen from a server instance screen, select Change SQL Login... from the menu. Complete the following fields: Authentication Mode Select either Use Windows authentication or Use SQL Server authentication from the drop-down menu. Login Name Type a valid login name that you want to use for the type of authentication you have selected. Password Type the password for the login name that you entered. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you were able to login to the SQL server instance.
Note
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing SQL Server instances
To stop a running SQL Server instance

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to stop. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. On the menu, click Stop. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to stop the SQL Server process for the selected instance. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the instance was stopped.
2 3
To start a stopped SQL Server instance

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to start. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. On the menu, click Start. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the instance was started.
2 3
To pause a SQL Server instance

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to pause. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. On the menu, click Pause. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the instance is being paused.
2 3
To resume a paused SQL Server instance

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to pause. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. On the menu, click Continue. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the instance is being resumed.
2 3
118
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing SQL Server databases
Managing SQL Server databases

You can manage SQL Server databases with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. To view databases
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that has the databases you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to the Databases folder. On the menu, click Select. The Databases screen appears, and displays the databases stored on the selected server.
To view a list of tables in a database

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the Tables icon. On the menu, click Select. The Select Table screen appears, and displays a list of tables
To view table layout

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the Tables icon. On the menu, click Select. The Select Table screen appears, and displays a list of tables Scroll to the table that you want to view layout for. On the menu, click Select. The Design Table screen for the selected table appears and displays the layout of the table.
2 3
To view table data

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the Tables icon. On the menu, click Select. The Select Table screen appears, and displays a list of tables. Scroll to the table that you want to view layout for. On the menu, click Select. The Design Table screen for the selected table appears and displays the layout of the table. On the menu, click Return All Rows. The Data screen for the selected table appears and displays all table data.
2 3 4
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
119
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing SQL Server databases
To view a view
1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the Views icon. On the menu, click Select. The Select View screen appears, and displays a list of views. Scroll to the view that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected view appears.
2 3
To view or edit stored procedures

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the Stored Procedures icon. On the menu, click Select. The Select Stored Procedure screen appears, and displays a list of stored procedures. Scroll to the view that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Stored Procedure screen for the selected procedure appears. To edit a stored procedure, type the required changes. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the procedure was stored.
2 3 4
To create a stored procedure

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the Stored Procedures icon. On the menu, click Select. The Select Stored Procedure screen appears, and displays a list of stored procedures. On the menu, click New Stored Procedure. Type the content of the stored procedure. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new stored procedure was saved.
2 3 4 5
To run an SQL query

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the Execute SQL Query icon. On the menu, click Select. The SQL Query screen appears. Type the SQL query that you want to run. On the menu, click Send. Mobile Admin displays the results of the query.
2 3 4
120
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To view database properties

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears.
To view database data files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Data Files. The Data Files screen for the selected database appears.
2 3
To add database data files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Data Files. The Data Files screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, click Add. The New Data File screen appears. Complete the following fields as required: File Name Type the file name for the data file. Location Type the file path for the location of the data file. Space Allocated (MB) Type the number of megabytes that you want to allocate for the data file. Filegroup Select the filegroup from the drop-down menu. Growth Type the percentage by which you want the data file to grow automatically. Maximum File Size Type the number of megabytes that you want to set as the maximum size for the data file. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new data file was saved.
2 3 4 5
To resize database data files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing SQL Server databases
The Properties screen for the selected database appears.

3 4 5 6 7
On the menu, select Data Files. The Data Files screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the data file you want to resize. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected process appears. On the menu, click Select. In the Space Allocated (MB) field, type the number of megabytes that you want to allocate for the data file. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the data file was saved.
To delete database data files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Data Files. The Data Files screen for the selected database appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
2 3 4
you do not want to view details about the data file before you delete it you want to view the details of a data file before you delete it
Scroll to the data file you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Scroll to the data file you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected data file appears. On the menu, click Delete.
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected data file.
5
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the data file was deleted.
To view database log files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Transaction Log. The Transaction Log screen for the selected database appears.
2 3
122
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To add database log files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Transaction Log. The Transaction Log screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, click Add. The New Transaction Log screen appears. Complete the following fields as required: File Name Type the file name for the data file. Location Type the file path for the location of the data file. Space Allocated (MB) Type the number of megabytes that you want to allocate for the data file. Growth Type the percentage by which you want the data file to grow automatically. Maximum File Size Type the number of megabytes that you want to set as the maximum size for the data file. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new transaction log was saved.
2 3 4 5
To resize database log files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Transaction Log. The Transaction Log screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to the transaction log that you want to resize. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected log file appears. In the Space Allocated (MB) field, type the number of megabytes that you want to allocate for the log file. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the log file was saved.
2 3 4 5 6
To delete database log files

1
Follow the procedure To view databases on page 119, and scroll to the database that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Properties. The Properties screen for the selected database appears. On the menu, select Data Files.
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
123
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing SQL Server processes
The Data Files screen for the selected database appears.:

4

If Then
you do not want to view details about the log file before you delete it you want to view the details of a log file before you delete it
Scroll to the log file you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Scroll to the log file you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected log file appears. On the menu, click Delete.
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected data file.
5
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the data file was deleted.
Managing SQL Server processes

You can manage SQL Server processes with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. To view processes
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to view activity for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to the Management folder. On the menu, click Select. The Management screen appears. Scroll to the Current Activity icon. On the menu, click Select. The SQL Server Agent screen appears. Scroll to the Process Info icon. On the menu, click Select. The Process Info screen appears, and displays a summary list of current activity.
2 3 4 5
To kill a process
1
Follow the procedure To view processes on page 124.
124
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the SQL Server Agent and jobs

If Then
you do not want to view process details before you kill the process you want to view the details of a process before you kill the process
Scroll to the process you want to kill. On the menu, click

Kill Process.
Scroll to the process you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected process appears. On the menu, click Kill Process.
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to kill the selected process.
3
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the process was killed.
Managing the SQL Server Agent and jobs

You can manage the SQL Server Agent and SQL Server jobs with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. To start/stop the SQL Server Agent
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to the Management folder. On the menu, click Select. The Management screen appears. Scroll to the SQL Server Agent icon. On the menu, click Select. The SQL Server Agent screen appears. On the menu, click Start/Stop. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the agent is being started/has been stopped.
2 3 4 5
To view jobs
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to the Management folder. On the menu, click Select. The Management screen appears. Scroll to the SQL Server Agent icon. On the menu, click Select. The SQL Server Agent screen appears. Scroll to the Jobs icon. On the menu, click Select.
2 3 4 5
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing the SQL Server Agent and jobs
The Jobs screen appears.

6
To view details for a specific job, scroll to the job you want view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected job appears.
To start a job
1 2
Follow the procedure To view jobs on page 125 and view details for the job you want to start. On the menu, click Start Job. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the job was started.
To stop a job
1 2
Follow the procedure To view jobs on page 125 and view details for the job you want to stop. On the menu, click Stop Job. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the job was stopped.
To change a job
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view jobs on page 125 and view details for the job you want to change. Type the changes that you want to make to the job details. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the job was saved.
To delete a job
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view jobs on page 125 and view details for the job you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the job. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the job was deleted.
To view a job history

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view jobs on page 125 and view details for the job that you want to view history for. On the menu, click View Job History. The Job History screen appears. To view details of the job history, scroll to the history file that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Job Outcome screen appears.
126
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing SQL Server replication
To clear a job history

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view jobs on page 125 and view details for the job that you want to view history for. On the menu, click View Job History. The Job History screen appears. On the menu, click Clear All. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to clear the job history. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the job history was cleared.
Managing SQL Server replication

You can manage the SQL replication with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. SQL replication includes starting and stopping synchronizations To view subscriptions
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want view subscriptions for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to the Replication folder. On the menu, click Select. The Replication screen appears. Scroll to the Subscriptions folder. On the menu, click Select. The Subscriptions screen appears and displays a list of subscriptions. To view details for a subscription, scroll to the subscription that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected subscription appears.
2 3 4 5
To start synchronization
1 2
Follow the procedure To view subscriptions on page 127, and select the subscription that you want to synchronize. On the menu, click Start Synchronizing. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the subscription is being synchronized.
To stop synchronization
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view subscriptions on page 127, and select the subscription that you want to stop synchronizing. On the menu, click Stop Synchronizing. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to stop synchronizing the subscription. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the synchronization was stopped.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
127
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing the replication monitor
To delete a subscription
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view subscriptions on page 127, and select the subscription that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the subscription. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the subscription was deleted.
To view the replication job history

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view subscriptions on page 127, and select the subscription that you want to view the job history for. On the menu, click Job History. The Job History screen appears. Scroll to a job record that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected job record appears.
To clear the replication job history

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view subscriptions on page 127, and select the subscription that you want to clear the job history for. On the menu, click Job History. The Job History screen appears. On the menu, click Clear History. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to clear the job history. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the job history was cleared.
Managing the replication monitor

You can manage the replication monitor with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected, including managing agents. To view a list of agents
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want view a list of agents for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to Replication Monitor. On the menu, click Select. The Replication Monitor screen appears. Scroll to the Agents folder. On the menu, click Select. The Agents screen appears.
3 4
128
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the replication monitor
Scroll to the folder that corresponds to the type of agent you want to view a list of. On the menu, click Select. The Agents screen for the selected type appears and displays a list of agents.
To view details for an agent

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of agents on page 128. Scroll to the agent you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected agent appears.
To start an agent
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of agents on page 128. Scroll to the agent you want to start. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected agent appears. On the menu, click Start Agent.
To stop an agent
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of agents on page 128. Scroll to the agent you want to stop. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected agent appears. On the menu, click Stop Agent.
To view or change agent profiles

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of agents on page 128. Scroll to the agent you want to view or change agent profiles for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected agent appears. On the menu, click Agent Profiles. The SQL screen for the selected agent appears. In the Select the profile for this agent field, select from the available profiles. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the change was saved.
3 4 5
To view agent history

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of agents on page 128. Scroll to the agent you want to view or change agent profiles for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected agent appears. On the menu, click Agent History. The SQL screen for the selected agent appears and displays history files.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
129
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing SQL Server logins
Scroll to the file you want to view. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays details for the selected file.
Managing SQL Server logins

You can manage the SQL Server logins with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. To view login information
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the SQL Server Enterprise Manager icon. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager screen appears and lists available SQL instances. Scroll to the SQL instance that you want view login information for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to the Security folder. On the menu, click Select. The Security screen appears. Scroll to the Logins icon. On the menu, click Select. The Logins screen appears and displays a list of logins. To view details for a login, scroll to the login that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected login appears.
3 4 5
To create a login
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view login information on page 130 until the Logins screen appears. On the menu, click New Login. The New Login screen appears. Complete the following fields as required: Name type a name of the user for the new login Password type a password for the new login Confirm Password type the password a second time to confirm Default Database select the default SQL database for these login credentials from the drop-down menu On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the login was saved.
To edit a login
1 2
Follow the procedure To view login information on page 130 and select the login that you want to edit. Edit the following fields as required: Name type the new name of the user for the login
130
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing SQL Server logins
Default Database select the default database for these login credentials from the
drop-down menu On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To delete a login
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view login information on page 130 and select the login that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the login. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the login was deleted.
To reset a password
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view login information on page 130 and select the login that you want to change the password for. On the menu, click Change Password. The Change Password screen appears. Complete the following fields: New Password type a new password for the login Confirm Password type the password a second time to confirm On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new password was saved.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
131
Manag ing Microso ft SQL Servers (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing SQL Server logins
132
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Internet Information Services (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the IIS application
Managing Microsoft Internet Information Services (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS).
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected an IIS server to manage from your server list.
Managing the IIS application

You can manage the IIS application in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To access the IIS application From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears.
To restart IIS
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears. On the menu, click Restart IIS. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to restart IIS on the selected server. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that IIS was restarted.
2 3
To restore the IIS configuration from a backup

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears. On the menu, click Restore Configuration. The Configuration Restore screen appears. Scroll to the backup configuration that you want to use to restore IIS. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected backup appears and displays details about the backup configuration.
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft Int ernet Info rmat ion Se rv ices (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing web sites
On the menu, click Restore. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to use the selected backup to restore the IIS configuration. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the configuration has been restored.
Managing web sites

You can manage web sites in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To view the list of web sites
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears. Scroll to the Web Sites folder. On the menu, click Select. The Web Sites screen appears, and displays a list of web sites that are run from the selected server.
To view the list of virtual directories for a web site

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears. Scroll to the Web Sites folder. On the menu, click Select. The Web Sites screen appears, and displays a list of web sites that are run from the selected server. Scroll to the web site that you want to view virtual directories. On the menu, click Select. The web site screen appears and displays a list of virtual directory folders.
2 3
To stop a web site

1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the list of virtual directories for the web site that you want to stop. On the menu, click Stop. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the web site was stopped.
To start a stopped web site

1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the list of virtual directories for the web site that you want to start. On the menu, click Start. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the web site was started.
To pause a web site

1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the list of virtual directories for the web site that you want to pause. On the menu, click Pause.
134
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Internet Information Services (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing virtual directories
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the web site was paused. To resume a paused web site
1 2
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the list of virtual directories for the web site that you want to resume. On the menu, click Resume. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the web site was resumed.
To view or change a web site description

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the list of virtual directories for the web site that you want to resume. On the menu, click Properties. The web site screen appears. To change the web site description, type the new text in the Description field. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new description was saved.
Managing virtual directories

You can manage virtual directories in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To view subdirectories in a virtual directory
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears. Scroll to the Web Sites folder. On the menu, click Select. The Web Sites screen appears, and displays a list of web sites that are run from the selected server. Scroll to the web site that you want to view virtual directories for. On the menu, click Select. The web site screen appears and displays a list of virtual directory folders. Scroll to the virtual directory that you would like to view subdirectories for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected virtual directory appears, and displays the subdirectories for the selected virtual directory.
2 3
4 5
To view or change virtual directory properties

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view subdirectories in a virtual directory on page 135 and view the subdirectories of the virtual directory that you want to view properties for. On the menu, click Properties. The screen for the web site appears and displays the virtual directory properties. To edit virtual directory properties, type the changes as required. On the menu, click Save.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
135
Manag ing Microso ft Int ernet Info rmat ion Se rv ices (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing virtual directories
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved. To view or edit document settings for a virtual directory
1
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the subdirectories of the virtual directory that you want to view or edit document settings for. On the menu, click Properties. The screen for the web site appears and displays the virtual directory properties. On the menu, click Documents. The document settings for the virtual directory appear. To edit document settings, type the changes as required. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3 4
To point a virtual directory to a network share To point a virtual directory to a network share, the virtual directory must currently point to a local directory or a URL.
1
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the subdirectories of the virtual directory that you want to point to a network share. On the menu, click Properties. The screen for the web site appears and displays the virtual directory properties. On the menu, click Change to a Network Share. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3
To point a virtual directory to a local directory To point a virtual directory to a local directory, the virtual directory must currently point to a network share or a URL.
1
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the subdirectories of the virtual directory that you want to point to a local directory. On the menu, click Properties. The screen for the web site appears and displays the virtual directory properties. On the menu, click Change to a Local Directory. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3
To redirect a virtual directory to a URL To redirect a virtual directory to a URL, the virtual directory must currently be directed to a local directory or a network directory.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view the list of virtual directories for a web site on page 134 and view the subdirectories of the virtual directory that you want to redirect to a URL. On the menu, click Properties. The screen for the web site appears and displays the virtual directory properties. On the menu, click Change to a URL Redirect.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
136
Managing Microsoft Internet Information Services (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing FTP sites
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
Managing FTP sites

You can manage FTP sites in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To view a list of FTP sites
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears. Scroll to the FTP Sites folder. On the menu, click Select. The FTP Sites screen appears, and displays a list of FTP sites that are run from the selected server.
To view a list of virtual directories on an FTP site

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Internet Information Services icon. The Internet Information Services screen appears. Scroll to the FTP Sites folder. On the menu, click Select. The FTP Sites screen appears, and displays a list of FTP sites that are run from the selected server. Scroll to the FTP site that you want to view virtual directories for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected FTP site appears and displays a list of virtual directories.
2 3
To stop an FTP site

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of virtual directories on an FTP site and view the list of the virtual directories for the FTP site that you want to stop. On the menu, click Stop. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the FTP site was stopped.
To start a stopped FTP site

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of virtual directories on an FTP site and view the list of the virtual directories for the FTP site that you want to start. On the menu, click Start. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the FTP site was started.
To pause an FTP site

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of virtual directories on an FTP site and view the list of the virtual directories for the FTP site that you want to pause. On the menu, click Pause. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the FTP site was paused.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
137
Manag ing Microso ft Int ernet Info rmat ion Se rv ices (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing FTP sites
To resume a paused FTP site

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of virtual directories on an FTP site and view the list of the virtual directories for the FTP site that you want to resume. On the menu, click Resume. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the FTP site was resumed.
138
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft DHCP Managing scopes and superscopes
Managing Microsoft DHCP

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a DHCP server to manage from your server list.
Managing scopes and superscopes

You can manage DHCP scopes and superscopes with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. To view DHCP scopes and superscopes From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DHCP Manager icon. The DHCP Manager screen appears and lists the top-level scopes and superscopes.
To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DHCP Manager icon. The DHCP Manager screen appears and lists the top-level scopes and superscopes. Scroll to the scope or superscope that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected scope or superscope appears. If you have selected a scope, the screen displays information about the scope. If you have selected a superscope, it displays all the scopes that are contained in the superscope. To view information about a scope within a superscope, scroll to the scope you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected scope appears.
To create a superscope
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DHCP Manager icon. The DHCP Manager screen appears and lists the top-level scopes and superscopes. On the menu, click New Superscope. The New Superscope screen appears. In the Name field, type a name for the new superscope. Select the check box next to each scope that you want to include in the superscope. On the menu, click Save.
2 3 4 5
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
139
Manag ing Microso ft DHC P Managing scopes and superscopes
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new superscope was created.
To delete a superscope To delete a superscope, you must either remove or delete all the scopes in the superscope. When you remove or delete the last scope in a superscope, the system deletes the superscope.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and select the superscope that you want to delete. Remove or delete each scope in the superscope by following the procedures To delete a scope on page 141 or To remove a scope from a superscope on page 141. When you delete or remove the last scope in the superscope, Mobile Admin displays a message to indicate that the superscope will be deleted when you remove or delete the scope. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the scope was removed or deleted.
To deactivate an activated superscope

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DHCP Manager icon. The DHCP Manager screen appears and lists the top-level superscopes. Scroll to the superscope that you want to deactivate. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected superscope appears and displays all the scopes that are contained in the superscope. On the menu, click Deactivate. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the superscope was deactivated.
To activate a deactivated superscope

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DHCP Manager icon. The DHCP Manager screen appears and lists the top-level superscopes. Scroll to the superscope that you want to deactivate. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected superscope appears and displays all the scopes that are contained in the superscope. On the menu, click Activate. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the superscope was activated.
To create a scope
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DHCP Manager icon. The DHCP Manager screen appears and lists the top-level scopes and superscopes. On the menu, click New Scope. The New Scope screen appears. Complete the following fields as required:
2 3
140
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Name type a name for the new scope Description type a description of the new scope Start IP Address type the IP address at the beginning of the range of addresses for
the scope End IP Address type the IP address at the end of the range of addresses for the scope Subnet Mask type the IP address for the scopes subnet mask
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the scope was created.
To delete a scope
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the scope. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the scope was deleted.
To add a scope to a superscope

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to add to a superscope. On the menu, click Add to Superscope. The Add to Superscope screen appears. In the Select Superscope field, specify the superscope to which you want to add the scope. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the scope was added to the superscope.
To remove a scope from a superscope

1
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to remove from within a superscope. On the menu, click Remove from Superscope. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the scope from the superscope. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the scope was removed from the superscope.
2 3
To edit scope properties Use this procedure to change the name, the IP address range, the lease duration for the scope, or the subnet mask for a scope.
1 2
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to edit properties for. Type your changes as required.
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To deactivate an activated scope

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the activated scope that you want to deactivate. On the menu, click Deactivate. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the scope has been deactivated.
To activate a deactivated scope

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the deactivated scope that you want to activate. On the menu, click Activate. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the scope has been activated.
To create scope reservations

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to create reservations for. On the menu, click Reservations. The Reservations screen appears. On the menu, click Add. Complete the following fields as required: Reservation Name type a name for the reservation IP Address type the IP address of the reservation MAC Address type the MAC address for the reservation Description type a description for the reservation On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the reservation was saved.
To view or edit scope reservations

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to view reservations for. On the menu, click Reservations. The Reservations screen appears. Scroll to the reservation that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Reservation screen appears. To edit the reservation, type new information in the Reservation Name, IP Address, MAC Address, and Description fields, as required. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the reservation changes were saved.
142
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To delete scope reservations

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that has the reservation you want to delete. On the menu, click Reservations. The Reservations screen appears. Scroll to the reservation that you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The Reservation screen appears. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the reservation. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the reservation has been deleted.
To create scope exclusions

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to create scope exclusions for. On the menu, click Exclusions. The Exclusions screen appears. On the menu, click Add. The Exclusion screen appears. Complete the following fields: Start IP Address type the address for the start of the IP address range to be excluded from the scope End IP Address type the address for the end of the IP address range to be excluded from the scope On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the exclusion was saved.
To view scope exclusions

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to view exclusions for. On the menu, click Exclusions. The Exclusions screen appears.
To delete scope exclusions

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a scope or a list of scopes within a superscope on page 139 and view the details for the scope that you want to delete scope exclusions for. On the menu, click Exclusions. The Exclusions screen appears. Scroll to the exclusion that you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The Exclusion screen appears. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the exclusion. Click Yes.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the exclusion has been deleted.
144
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft DNS Viewing DNS information, managing zones, and adding records
Managing Microsoft DNS

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Domain Name System (DNS) servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a DNS server to manage from your server list.
Viewing DNS information, managing zones, and adding records

You can view a range of DNS information, manage zones, and add records with Mobile Admin on the DNS server you have selected. To clear the server cache
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DNS icon. The DNS screen appears. On the menu, click Clear Cache. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the cache was cleared.
To scavenge stale resource records

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DNS icon. The DNS screen appears. On the menu, click Scavenge Stale Records. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to scavenge all the stale records on the selected server. Click Yes.
To view a list of forward lookup zones

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DNS icon. The DNS screen appears. Scroll to Forward Lookup Zones. On the menu, click Select. The Forward Lookup Zones screen appears and lists the forward lookup zones on the selected server.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
145
Manag ing Microso ft DNS Viewing DNS information, managing zones, and adding records
To view a list of reverse lookup zones

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the DNS icon. The DNS screen appears. Scroll to Reverse Lookup Zones. On the menu, click Select. The Reverse Lookup Zones screen appears and lists the reverse lookup zones on the selected server.
To view a list of subdomains and resource records within a zone

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of forward lookup zones on page 145 or To view a list of reverse lookup zones on page 146. Scroll to the zone that you want to view subdomains and resource records for. On the menu, click Select.
To view a list of subdomains and resource records within a subdomain

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of forward lookup zones on page 145 or To view a list of reverse lookup zones on page 146. Scroll to the zone that you want to view subdomains and resource records for. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a list of subdomains and resource records for the selected zone. If required, scroll to the subdomain you want to view subdomains and resource records for. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a list of subdomains and resource records for the selected subdomain.
To reload a zone
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of forward lookup zones on page 145 or To view a list of reverse lookup zones on page 146. Scroll to the zone that you want to reload. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a list of subdomains and resource records for the selected zone. On the menu, click Reload Zone. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to reload the selected zone. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the zone was reloaded.
To pause a zone
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of forward lookup zones on page 145 or To view a list of reverse lookup zones on page 146. Scroll to the zone that you want to reload. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a list of subdomains and resource records for the selected zone. On the menu, click Pause Zone. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the zone was paused.
146
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To resume a paused zone

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of forward lookup zones on page 145 or To view a list of reverse lookup zones on page 146. Scroll to the zone that you want to resume. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a list of subdomains and resource records for the selected zone. On the menu, click Start Zone. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the zone was resumed.
To add a new record (A, CNAME, MX and PTR) You can use Mobile Admin to create these types of new records: Host (A), Alias (CNAME), Mail Exchanger (MX), and Pointer (PTR).
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of forward lookup zones on page 145 or To view a list of reverse lookup zones on page 146. Scroll to the zone that you want to add a record for. On the menu, click New Record. The Select New Record Type screen appears. Scroll to the type of record you want to create. On the menu, click Select. The Create a New [Record Type] screen appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
you are creating a Host (A) record
complete the following fields:

Host (uses parent domain if left blank) type the name
of the host IP Address type the IP address of the host you are creating an Alias (CNAME) record complete the following fields:
Alias Name type the name of the alias host name Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for target host
type the FQDN that the alias will point to you are creating a Mail Exchanger (MX) record complete the following fields: Host (uses parent domain if left blank) type the name of the host Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of mail server type the FQDN of the mail server Mail Server Priority type a number to define the priority for this mail route (default is 10) complete the following fields:
Host IP Number type the IP address of the host Host Name type the name of the host
you are creating a Pointer (PTR) record
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new record was created.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
147
To view or edit record properties (all types) You can use Mobile Admin to view or change these types of records: Host (A), Alias (CNAME), Mail Exchanger (MX), Name Server (NS), Pointer (PTR), and Start of Authority (SOA).
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of forward lookup zones on page 145 or To view a list of reverse lookup zones on page 146. Scroll to the zone that you want to select. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a list of subdomains and resource records for the selected zone. Scroll to the record that you want to view or change. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected record appears, and displays record properties. Do the following:
If Then
you are changing a Host (A) record you are changing an Alias (CNAME) record you are changing a Mail Exchanger (MX) record
edit the following fields: Host (uses parent domain if left blank) the name of the host IP Address the IP address of the host edit the following fields:
Alias Name type the name of the alias host name Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for target host the FQDN
that the alias will point to edit the following fields:

Host (uses parent domain if left blank) the name of the host Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of mail server the FQDN of
the mail server Mail Server Priority a number to define the priority for this mail route (default is 10)
148
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
If
Then
you are changing a Name Server (NS) record you are changing a Pointer (PTR) record you are changing a Start of Authority (SOA) record
edit the following field:

Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of mail server the FQDN of
the mail server edit the following fields: Host IP Number the IP address of the host Host Name the name of the host edit the following fields:
Serial Number the serial number for the zone to which the record
belongs Primary Server the name of the authoritative DNS Server for the zone Responsible Party the name of the responsible party for the zone to which the record belongs Refresh Interval (seconds) the time, in seconds, before the zone containing this record should be refreshed Retry Interval (seconds) the time, in seconds, before retrying a failed refresh of the zone to which this record belongs Expires after (seconds) the time, in seconds, before an unresponsive zone is no longer authoritative Minimum (default) TTL (seconds) the lower limit on the time, in seconds, that a DNS Server or caching resolver are allowed to cache any resource record from the zone to which this record belongs TTL for this record (seconds) the amount of time, in seconds, that a DNS Server or caching resolver are allowed to cache any resource record from the zone to which this record belongs
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
149
150
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mana ging Microso ft Clu ster Servers (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing cluster nodes
Managing Microsoft Cluster Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Cluster Servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a Microsoft Cluster Server to manage from your server list.
Managing cluster nodes

You can manage cluster nodes in Mobile Admin for the Cluster Server you have selected. To view a list of nodes From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Cluster Administrator icon. The Cluster Administrator screen appears, and displays group and resource folders, as well as a list of nodes.
To view node properties

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Cluster Administrator icon. The Cluster Administrator screen appears, and displays group and resource folders, as well as a list of nodes. Scroll to the node that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected node appears, and displays node properties.
To editing the node description

1 2
Follow the procedure To view node properties on page 151. In the Description field, type a new description. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new description was saved.
To view a list of network interfaces for a node

1 2
Follow the procedure To view node properties on page 151. On the menu, click Network Interfaces. The screen for the selected node appears and displays a list of network interfaces.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
151
Manag ing Microso ft Clu ster Servers (Mo bile A dm in Prof ession al Only) Managing groups
To view a list of active groups on a node

1 2
Follow the procedure To view node properties on page 151. On the menu, click Active Groups. The Groups screen appears and displays a list of active groups for the selected node.
Managing groups
You can manage cluster node groups in Mobile Admin for the Cluster Server you have selected. To view a list of groups
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Cluster Administrator icon. The Cluster Administrator screen appears, and displays group and resource folders, as well as a list of nodes. Scroll to Groups folder. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears, and displays a list of groups for the cluster.
To view group properties

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 152. Scroll to the group that you want to view properties for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties.
To edit the group description

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 152. Scroll to the group that you want to edit the description for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties. In the Description field, type a new description. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new description was saved.
To view preferred owners for a group

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Cluster Administrator icon. The Cluster Administrator screen appears, and displays group and resource folders, as well as a list of nodes. Scroll to Groups folder. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears, and displays a list of groups for the cluster. Scroll to the group that you want to edit the description for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties. On the menu, click Preferred Owners. The Preferred Owners screen appears and displays the nodes that are preferred owners of the group.
2 3 4
152
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mana ging Microso ft Clu ster Servers (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing groups
To add a preferred owner to a group

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view preferred owners for a group on page 152. On the menu, click Add. The Select Node to Add screen appears. Scroll to the node that you want to add to the list of preferred owners. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the node was added as a preferred owner.
To remove a preferred owner from a group

1 2
Follow the procedure To view preferred owners for a group on page 152. Scroll to the preferred owner that you want to remove. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the node was removed as a preferred owner.
To take an online group offline

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 152. Scroll to the group that you want to take offline. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties. On the menu, click Take Offline. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was taken offline.
To bring an offline group online

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 152. Scroll to the group that you want to bring online. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties. On the menu, click Bring Online. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was brought online.
To move a group to the next node on the preferred owners list

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 152. Scroll to the group that you want to move. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties. On the menu, click Move. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was moved to the next node on the preferred owners list.
To change group failback settings

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 152. Scroll to the group that you want to change failback settings for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties. On the menu, click Failback. The Failback screen for the selected group appears.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
153
Manag ing Microso ft Clu ster Servers (Mo bile A dm in Prof ession al Only) Managing cluster resources
Complete the following fields as required: Failback Type select the failback setting you want to configure from the drop-down menu: Prevent Failback, Allow Failback Immediately, or Allow Failback Between Start if you select Allow Failback Between, type the hour, from the 24-hour clock, that failback will start being allowed End if you select Allow Failback Between, type the hour, from the 24-hour clock, that failback will stop being allowed On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new settings were saved.
To change group failover settings

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 152. Scroll to the group that you want to change failover settings for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected group appears, and displays group properties. On the menu, click Failover. The Failover screen for the selected group appears. Complete the following fields as required: Threshold type the number of times the group can fail within the period you specify in the Period (hours) field Period (hours) type the number of hours during which the number of group failures will count toward the number allowed in the Threshold field On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new settings were saved.
3 4
Managing cluster resources

You can manage cluster resources in Mobile Admin for the Cluster Server you have selected. To view a list of resources
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Cluster Administrator icon. The Cluster Administrator screen appears, and displays group and resource folders, as well as a list of nodes. Scroll to Resources folder. On the menu, click Select. The Resources screen appears, and displays a list of groups for the cluster server.
To view resource properties

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to view properties for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties.
154
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mana ging Microso ft Clu ster Servers (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing cluster resources
To edit a resource description

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to edit the description for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties. In the Description field, type a new description. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new description was saved.
To change a resource group

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to change resource groups for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties. On the menu, click Change Group. The Select New Group screen appears. Scroll to the group that you want to move the resource to. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the resource group was changed.
3 4
To view a list of resource dependencies

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to view a list of resource dependencies for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties. On the menu, click Dependencies. The Dependencies screen appears and displays a list of dependencies for the selected resource.
To remove a resource dependency

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to remove a dependency from. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties. On the menu, click Dependencies. The Dependencies screen appears and displays a list of dependencies for the selected resource. Scroll to the dependency that you want to remove. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the dependency was removed.
3 4
To take a resource offline

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to take offline. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties. On the menu, click Take Offline. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the cluster resource was taken offline.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
155
Manag ing Microso ft Clu ster Servers (Mo bile A dm in Prof ession al Only) Managing cluster resources
To bring a resource online

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to bring online. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties. On the menu, click Bring Online. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the cluster resource was brought online.
To initiate the failure of a resource

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of resources on page 154. Scroll to the resource that you want to initiate failure for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected resource appears, and displays resource properties. On the menu, click Initiate Failure. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the failure of the resource was initiated.
156
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft System Cen ter Operat ions Manag er 2007 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing Operations Manager
Managing Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only)
This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage the Microsoft System Centre Operations Manager 2007.
Note
In order to manage Operations Manager servers with Mobile Admin, the System Center Operations Manager 2007 SP1 Client Tools or the Operations Manager 2007 User Interface (32-bit) must be installed on the same machine as the Mobile Admin Server. All procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected an Operations Manager server to manage from your server list.
Note
Managing Operations Manager

To access Operations Manager From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Operations Manager 2007 icon. The System Center Operations Manager screen opens.
Alerts
This section contains procedures for managing Operations Manager alerts. To view alerts
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access Operations Manager on page 157. Select Alerts on the menu. The Personalize Alert View page opens. Select/enter alert criteria to refine results. Select Get alerts. The Alerts Displayed page opens displaying the alerts fitting the criteria entered in step 3.
To view alert details

1
Follow the procedure To view alerts on page 157.

Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft System Cen ter Operat ions Manag er 2007 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Computers
Select the alert for which you want to view details. The Alert Name page opens displaying alert details.
To manage an alert
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view alert details on page 157. In the Owner and Ticket ID fields, enter/modify the relevant information, and/or change the alerts status in the Alert status drop-down menu. Click the Save button. A confirmation dialog opens. Click OK.
To resolve an alert
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view alert details on page 157. Click Resolve alert on the menu. Mobile Admin jumps to a screen where the server producing the alert can be managed. Proceed with the appropriate Mobile Admin management activity to resolve the alert. Resolving an alert does not automatically change its status in Operations Manager. To change the status of an alert, see To manage an alert on page 158.
Note
Computers
This section contains procedures for viewing the health of computers monitored by Operations Manager. To view computers
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access Operations Manager on page 157. Select Computers on the menu. The Personalize Computer View page opens. Select/enter alert criteria to refine results. Select Get Computers on the menu. The Computers page opens displaying a list of computers fitting the criteria entered in step 3.
To view computer health states

1 2
Follow the procedure To view computers on page 158. Select the computer for which you want to view health states. The Computer Name page opens displaying health state details for that computer.
To resolve a computer health state

1 2
Follow the procedure To view computer health states on page 158. Select Resolve State on the menu.
158
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mobile Admin jumps to a screen where the server showing the health state can be managed. .
3
Proceed with the appropriate Mobile Admin management activity to correct the health state.
To invoke maintenance mode for a computer

Note
Mobile Admin does not support the starting/stopping of maintenance mode on Operations Manager 2007 SP1 servers that are installed on Windows Server 2008. Follow the procedure To view computer health states on page 158. Select Start maintenance mode... on the menu. The Start maintenance mode... menu item will only appear if the computer is not already in maintenance mode. The Schedule maintenance mode for computer name page opens.
1 2
Note
3 4
Enter/choose the required information in the Maintenance mode duration (in hours), Maintenance mode reason and Comment fields/menus. Select Save. A message appears confirming that maintenance mode has started for the selected computer.
To stop maintenance mode for a computer

Note
Mobile Admin does not support the starting/stopping of maintenance mode on Operations Manager 2007 SP1 servers that are installed on Windows Server 2008. Follow the procedure To view computer health states on page 158. Select Stop maintenance mode... on the menu. The Stop maintenance mode... menu item will only appear if the computer is in maintenance mode. A page opens asking you to confirm that you want to stop maintenance mode for the selected computer.
1 2
Note
Select Ok. A message appears confirming that maintenance mode has stopped for the selected computer.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
159
160
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft System Cent re Mob ile Devic e Manag er 2008 SP1 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing System Center Mobile Device Manager
Managing Microsoft System Centre Mobile Device Manager 2008 SP1 (Mobile Admin Professional Only)
This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin to manage a System Center Mobile Device Manager 2008 SP1.
Note
The SCMDM 2008 SP1 Administrator Tools must be installed on the same system as Mobile Admin to manage Mobile Device Manager servers with Mobile Admin. All procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a Mobile Device Manager server from your Manage Servers list or the Mobile Device Manager service from the Manage Services list.
Note
Managing System Center Mobile Device Manager

To view a list of System Center Mobile Device Manager servers From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Mobile Device Manager 2008 icon. The System Center Mobile Device Manager Console screen appears. All Managed Devices Enrolled devices and device details are accessed through this section. To view a list of managed devices Select All Managed Devices. The All Managed Devices screen opens displaying a list of devices.
To view device details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of managed devices. Select the device for which you want to view details. The Device Details screen opens.
To create pre-enrollment
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of managed devices. Select Create pre-enrollment... on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing Microso ft System Cen tre Mob ile Dev ice Manag er 2008 SP1 ( Mobi le Adm in Prof essio nal Only) Managing System Center Mobile Device Manager
The Pre-Enrollment screen opens.

3
Perform the following: a Enter the device name you wish to enroll in the Device name field b Select the organizational unit in which the device belongs from the drop-down menu c Enter owner information in the Owner field. The owner must exist in Active Directory. You can enter the common name, email address, distinguished name, security ID (SID), or logon ID of the device owner. If you specify a blank value, the commandlet uses the owner name Anonymous.
d
Note
Check the Activate VPN and/or Send e-mail confirmation check-box/es if desired.
Select Save. The Pre-Enrollment Successful screen opens, displaying pre-enrollment details, including the enrollment password. Document the password carefully as it is not retrievable by any other means. Select Password confirmed. The Pending Enrollments page opens, displaying a list of pending device enrollments. Blocked Devices Blocked devices and their details are accessed through this section.
Note
5
To view a list of blocked devices Select Blocked Devices. The Blocked Devices screen opens, displaying a list of blocked devices.
To view blocked device details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of blocked devices. Select the blocked device for which you want to view details. The Device Name page opens, displaying device details.
To unblock a device
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view blocked device details. Select Unblock on the menu. A dialog opens asking you for confirmation. Select OK. The Unblocked Device screen opens. Select OK. The Blocked Devices screen opens, displaying an updated list of blocked devices. Pending Enrollments Pending enrolments and their properties are accessed through this section.
162
Mobile Admin 4.2
Manag ing Microso ft System Cent re Mob ile Devic e Manag er 2008 SP1 (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing System Center Mobile Device Manager
To view a list of pending enrollments Select Pending Enrollments. The Pending Enrollments screen opens, displaying a list of devices pending enrollment.
To view pending enrollment details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of pending enrollments. Select the device for which you want to view pending enrollment details. The Device Name screen opens, displaying device details.
To cancel an enrollment
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view pending enrollment details. Select Cancel enrollment on the menu. A dialog appears asking you for confirmation. Select OK. The Cancelled Enrollment screen opens. Select OK. Recent Wipes Recent wipes and their properties are accessed through this section.
To view a list of recent wipes Select Recent Wipes. The Recent Wipes screen opens displaying a list of recent wipes.
To view recent wipe details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of recent wipes. Select the wipe for which you want to view details. The Wipe Details screen opens displaying wipe details.
To cancel a wipe
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view recent wipe details. Select Cancel wipe on the menu. A dialog box opens asking you for confirmation. Select OK. The Wipe Cancelled screen opens. Select OK.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
163
Manag ing Microso ft System Cen tre Mob ile Dev ice Manag er 2008 SP1 ( Mobi le Adm in Prof essio nal Only) Managing System Center Mobile Device Manager
164
Mobile Admin 4.2
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Logging in to the Domino server
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Lotus Domino servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a Lotus Domino server to manage from your server list.
Logging in to the Domino server

If your Windows login credentials are different from your Lotus Domino login credentials, then the Domino Login screen will appear the first time that you access the Domino server with Mobile Admin. To log in to the Domino server
1
Complete the following fields: User ID type your Domino User Name. Password type your Domino Internet Password. On the menu, click Login.
Managing mailboxes
You can use Mobile Admin to manage mailboxes on the Domino server that you have selected from the server list. To view mailboxes
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino server that you want to view mailboxes for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected instance appears. Scroll to the Messaging icon. On the menu, click Select. The Messaging screen appears. Scroll to the mailbox that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected mailbox appears and lists messages in the message queue.
3 4
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing people and groups
To delete mail from a mailbox

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view mailboxes on page 165. Scroll to the mail message that you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected message appears and displays details about the message. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected message. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message was deleted.
Managing people and groups

You can use Mobile Admin to manage people and groups on the Domino server that you have selected from the server list. To view a list of people
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the People & Groups icon. On the menu, click Select. The Directory screen appears. Scroll to the People icon. On the menu, click Select. The People screen appears, and displays a list of people for the selected server.
2 3 4
To add a person
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. On the menu, click Add Person. The Add Person screen appears. Complete the following fields, as required: First Name type the first name of the new person Middle Name type the middle name of the new person Last Name type the last name of the new person User Name type the user name of the new person Short Name/UserID type the short name/user ID Personal Title type the employee title for the new person Generational Qualifier type the generational qualifier for the new person Internet Password type the Internet password for the new person Sametime Server type the name of the Sametime server for the new person Mail System select the mail system for the new person from the drop-down menu: Other, None, Notes, cc:Mail, Other Internet Mail, POP or IMAC, or X.400
166
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new person was saved.
To search for a person

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. On the menu, click Find... The Find Person screen appears. In the Name field, type a full or partial name for the person you want to find. On the menu, click Find. The Find Person screen appears, and displays the results of the search. Scroll to the person you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person.
To view a person
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person.
To edit information about a person

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person. Type changes in the fields listed in step 3 of the procedure To add a person on page 166, as required. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To delete a person
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected person. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the person was deleted.
To view or edit mail settings for a person

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to view or edit mail settings for. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person. On the menu, click Mail. The screen displays detailed mail information about the selected person.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
167
Mail system Select the users primary mail system from the list. Domain Type the domain name that the person is associated with. Mail server Type the hierarchical name of the server that stores the users mail file.
For example: Rove/Administration

Mail file Type the path for the users mail file. Forwarding address If the user does not receive their mail at the server and mail file
specified above, type the users complete mail address route including the domain name(s). For example, Jane Smith@Rovemobile@External. Internet address Type the users complete Internet email address. For example, When receiving unencrypted mail, encrypt before storing in your mailfile If selected, incoming mail will be encrypted before being delivered in the users mail database.
To view a list of groups

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the People & Groups icon. On the menu, click Select. The Directory screen appears. Scroll to the Groups icon. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears, and displays a list of groups for the selected server.
2 3 4
To add a group
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 168. On the menu, click Add Group. The Add Group screen appears. Complete the following fields, as required: Group Name type the name of the new group Group Type select the type of group from the drop-down menu: Multi-purpose, Access Control List only, Mail only, Servers only, Deny List only Category type the category for the new group Description type a description for the new group Mail Domain type the mail domain for the new group Internet Address type the Internet address for the new group On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new group was saved.
To search for a group

1
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 168.
168
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
2 3 4 5
On the menu, click Find... The Find Groups screen appears. In the Name field, type a full or partial name for the group you want to find. On the menu, click Find. The Find Groups screen appears, and displays the results of the search. Scroll to the group you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Group screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person.
To view group details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 168. Scroll to the group you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Group screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected group.
To edit group details

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To add a group on page 168. Scroll to the group you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Group screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected group. Type changes in the fields listed in step 3 of the procedure To add a group on page 168, as required. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To delete a group
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 168. Scroll to the group you want to delete. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected group. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was deleted.
To view members of a group

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 168. Scroll to the group you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected group. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears and displays a list of members of the group.
To add members to a group

1
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 168.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
169
2 3 4 5 6
Scroll to the group you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected group. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears and displays a list of members of the group. On the menu, click Add Member... The Add Member screen appears. In the Name field, type the partial name or full name of the user that you want to add to the group. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was added to the group.
To remove members from a group

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a list of groups on page 168. Scroll to the group you want to remove members from. On the menu, click Select. The Groups screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected group. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears and displays a list of members of the group. Scroll to the user you want to select. On the menu, click Remove Member. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected member. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was removed from the group.
To reset an Internet password

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person. In the Internet password field, type a new password for the user. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To force a person to change their Internet password on next login

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person. On the menu, click Administration. The administration details screen for the person appears. Select the Force user to change Internet Password on next login check box. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
170
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To edit password change intervals for a user You can specify how often a user must change their password to authenticate with servers that have password checking enabled. You can also specify a grace period, which is the number of days after a required change interval that a user can go without changing their password. If the user does not change their password during the grace period, then the user will be locked out of servers that have password checking enabled.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person. On the menu, click Administration. The administration details screen for the person appears. Do the following, as required:
If Then
you want to set an interval of time between required password changes for the user you want to set a grace period for the user to change passwords
5
in the Required change interval field, enter a number of days to set the interval
in the Grace period field, enter the number of days that the user can go without changing their password before they are locked out of servers that have password checking enabled.
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the settings were saved.
To reset a users password digest The password digest is a record of a persons password, stored as a digest in the Person document. The user must enter a password that matches the digest to authenticate with servers that have password checking enabled.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person. On the menu, click Administration. The administration details screen for the person appears. In the Password digest field, type a new password digest for the user. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the settings were saved.
To lockout a user ID, force a password check, or disable password checking for a user
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of people on page 166. Scroll to the person you want to force to change his or her Internet password. On the menu, click Select. The Person screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected person.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
171
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing administration requests
3 4
On the menu, click Administration. The administration details screen for the person appears. In the Check Password field, do one of the following:
If Then
you do not want to require the user to enter a password to authenticate with a server that has password checking enabled you want to require the user to enter a password to authenticate with a server that has password checking enabled you want to lock out the user from accessing servers that have password checking enabled
5
select Dont check password.
select Check password.
select Lockout ID.
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the settings were saved.
Managing administration requests

You can use Mobile Admin to manage administration requests on the Domino server that you have selected from the server list. To view an administration request
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Server icon. On the menu, click Select. The Server screen appears. Scroll to the Analysis icon. On the menu, click Select. The Analysis screen appears. Scroll to the Administration Requests icon. On the menu, click Select. A list of types of administration requests appears. Scroll to the type of administration request that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The list of selected administration requests appears. Scroll to the administration request that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. Details about the selected request appear.
2 3 4 5 6
172
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing server tasks
To accept or reject an administration request

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Server icon. On the menu, click Select. The Server screen appears. Scroll to the Analysis icon. On the menu, click Select. The Analysis screen appears. Scroll to the Administration Requests icon. On the menu, click Select. A list of types of administration requests appears. Scroll to the Pending Administrator Approval icon. On the menu, click Select. The Pending Administrator Approval screen appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
2 3 4 5 6 7
you want to view pending requests by date you want to view pending requests by server name
scroll to the By Age icon on the menu, click Select. scroll to the By Server icon on the menu, click Select.
The screen appears for type of view you have selected.

8 9
Navigate to the administration request that you want to accept or reject. On the menu, click Select. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want to accept the request you want to reject the request
select Accept [Administration Request Type] select Reject [Administration Request Type]
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to accept or reject the request.
10
Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the request was accepted or rejected.
Managing server tasks

You can use Mobile Admin to manage server tasks on the Domino server that you have selected from the server list. To view server tasks
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing server tasks
The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server.
2 3 4 5
Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Server icon. On the menu, click Select. The Server screen appears. Scroll to the Status icon. On the menu, click Select. The Status screen appears. Scroll to the Server Tasks icon. On the menu, click Select. The Server Tasks screen appears and displays a list of server tasks.
To start a new server task

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view server tasks on page 173. On the menu, click Start task. The Start Task screen appears and displays a list of new tasks you can start. Scroll to the task you want to start. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected task appears. On the menu, click Start. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the server task has been started.
To stop a running server task

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view server tasks on page 173. Scroll to a task that you want to stop. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected task appears. On the menu, click Stop. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the server task was stopped.
To restart a server task

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view server tasks on page 173. Scroll to a task that you want to restart. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected task appears. On the menu, click Restart. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the server task was restarted.
To send a tell command to a server task

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view server tasks on page 173. Scroll to a task that you want to send a tell command to. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected task appears. On the menu, click Tell. The Tell screen appears. In the Command field, type the command that you want to tell the task. On the menu, click Send.
174
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing server documents
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the command was sent. To stop a running port
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view server tasks on page 173. Scroll to a port that you want to stop. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected port appears. On the menu, click Stop port. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the port was stopped.
To restart a port
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view server tasks on page 173. Scroll to a port that you want to restart. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected port appears. On the menu, click Restart port. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the port was restarted.
To view a server log

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Server icon. On the menu, click Select. The Server screen appears. Scroll to the Analysis icon. On the menu, click Select. The Analysis screen appears. Scroll to the log for the Domino server. On the menu, click Select. A list of logs for the selected server appears. Scroll to the log that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The selected log appears.
2 3 4 5 6
Managing server documents

You can view and edit Lotus Domino server documents with Mobile Admin. To view a server document
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
175
Scroll to the Domino server that you want to manage server documents for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Configuration icon. On the menu, click Select. The Configuration screen appears. Scroll to the Server icon. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected server appears.
3 4
To edit the basics of a server document

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a server document on page 175. Edit the document as required: Server name Type the hierarchical name of the server. Server title Type a descriptive name for the server. Domain name Type the name of the servers Domino domain. Fully qualified Internet host name Type the name of the servers fully qualified domain name. For example, host.rovemobile.com. Cluster name Type the name of the cluster to which this server belongs. Load Internet configurations from Server/Internet Sites documents Select this check box if you want the server to load Internet protocol configuration information from the Server/Internet Sites view. If this check box is cleared, the server will load this information (except for HTTP) from the Server document. For HTTP, configuration information will be loaded from the Server\Web Configurations document. Maximum formula execution time Type the maximum time, in seconds, for formula execution. Server build number You cannot edit this field, which indicates the Notes build that the server is running. Mail Routing task If selected, the server will use standard Notes mail routing. X400 Mail Routing task If selected, the server will use X400 mail routing. SMTP Mail Routing task If selected, the server will use SMTP mail routing. ccMail Routing task If selected, the server will use ccMail routing. SMTP listener task If selected, the SMTP task starts automatically when the server starts and you do not have to add SMTP to the task list in Notes.ini. Servers phone number(s) Type phone number(s) to use to dial-in to the server. CPU count You cannot edit this field, which lists the number of CPUs on the server. Operating system You cannot edit this field, which lists the operating system used by the server. Is this a Sametime server? If selected, this field indicates that the server works as a Lotus Sametime Server. For more information, please see your Sametime Server documentation. On the menu, click Save.
To edit the security settings of a server document

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a server document on page 175. On the menu, click Security. The security settings screen appears.
176
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Edit the document as required, separating multiple entries in a field with commas: Full Access administrators Type the distinguished names of people allowed to administer the selected server with full access, including Manager access to all databases and full access to Web Administration databases. Administrators Type the distinguished names of people allowed to administer the selected server. See your Domino documentation for more information about what Administrators can do. Database Administrators Type the distinguished names of people allowed to administer the databases on the selected server, except for Web Administration databases. This type of administrator cannot issue remote console commands. Full Remote Console Administrators Type the distinguished names of people allowed to issue remote console commands on the selected server. View-only Administrators Type the distinguished names of people allowed to administer the selected server with view-only privileges. System Administrator Type the distinguished names of people allowed to issue operating system commands on the selected server. Restricted System Administrator Type the distinguished names of people allowed to issue operating system commands specified in the next field, Restricted System Commands. Restricted System Commands Type the subset of operating system commands that Restricted Access Administrators can use. Administer the server from a browser Type a group name or a list of distinguished names of people allowed to use the Web Administration application to administer this server. Run unrestricted methods and operations Type the distinguished names of people who can run agents without restrictions. Sign agents to run on behalf of someone else Type the names of entities that are allowed to sign agents that will run on behalf of anyone else. Sign agents to run on behalf of the invoker of the agent Type the names of entities that are allowed to sign agents that will run on behalf of the invoker. Run restricted LotusScript/Java agents Type the distinguished names of people who can run agents that use a subset of LotusScript or Java features. A blank entry means that only users with unrestricted rights to run LotusScript/Java agents can run agents of this type. Run Simple and Formula agents Type the distinguished names of people who can run simple and formula agents, private and shared. A blank entry means that all users and groups can run simple and formula agents, private and shared. Run script libraries to run on behalf of someone else Type the distinguished names of entities that can sign script libraries in agents executed by someone else. Run restricted Java/Javascript/COM Type the distinguished names of entities who can run restricted Java/Javascript/COM applications. Run unrestricted Java/Javascript/COM Type the distinguished names of entities who can run unrestricted Java/Javascript/COM applications. Access server Type the names of entities that are allowed to access the server. A blank entry means that all certified users and servers can access the server, except those listed in the Not access server field. Not access server Type the names of entities that are not allowed to access the server.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
177
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing databases and templates
Create databases & templates Type the names of entities that are allowed to create new databases and templates. Trusted servers Type the names of servers that are allowed to access the current server on behalf of someone else.
Click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
Managing databases and templates

You can manage Domino databases and templates with Mobile Admin. To view a database
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Files icon. On the menu, click Select. The Files screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to view. Databases have the file extension nsf. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears.
2 3 4
To compact a database
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a database on page 178. On the menu, click Compact. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the compactor process has been started on the selected database.
To fixup a database
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a database on page 178. On the menu, click Fixup. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that fixup process was performed on the selected database.
To delete a database
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a database on page 178. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected database. Click Yes.
178
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Sending Domino Console commands
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the selected database was deleted.
To view a template
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Files icon. On the menu, click Select. The Files screen appears. Scroll to the template that you want to view. Templates have the file extension ntf. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected template appears.
2 3 4
To compact a template
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a template on page 179. On the menu, click Compact. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the compactor process has been started on the selected template.
To fixup a template
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a template on page 179. On the menu, click Fixup. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that fixup process was performed on the selected template.
To delete a template
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a template on page 179. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected template. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the selected template was deleted.
Sending Domino Console commands

You can send Domino console commands with Mobile Admin.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
179
Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Sending Domino Console commands
To send a Domino Console command

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Domino Administrator icon. The Domino Administrator screen appears and displays the Domino partitions available on the selected server. Scroll to the Domino partition that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected partition appears. Scroll to the Server icon. On the menu, click Select. The Server screen appears. Scroll to the Status icon. On the menu, click Select. The Status screen appears. Scroll to the Server Console icon. On the menu, click Select. The command screen for the selected server appears. Type the server command in the blank field and click Send. The screen displays the results of the command.
2 3 4 5 6
180
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Novell (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Logging in to a Novell server
Managing Novell (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Novell servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a Novell server to manage from your server list.
Logging in to a Novell server

The Novell Login screen will appear the first time that you access a Novell server with Mobile Admin. To log into a Novell server
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console Login screen appears. Complete the following fields: Username Type a valid Novell user name, using Distinguished Name syntax. For example: cn=myname, o=mycompany. Password Type the password that is associated with the user name. On the menu, click Login. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you were successfully logged in. Close the message window. The Novell Console screen appears.
3 4
To re-authenticate a Novell server

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. On the menu, click Re-authenticate. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to re-authenticate. Click Yes. The Novell Console Login screen appears. Complete the following fields: Username Type a valid Novell user name, using Distinguished Name syntax. Password Type the password that is associated with the user name.
2 3 4
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Novell (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing eDirectory and NDS servers
5 6
On the menu, click Login. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you were successfully logged in. Close the message window.
The Novell Console screen appears.
Managing eDirectory and NDS servers

You can manage the eDirectory and NDS servers in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To view an organization
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Scroll to the organization that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Novell Console screen for the selected organization appears.
2 3
To view the properties of an organization

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Scroll to the organization that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Novell Console screen for the selected organization appears and lists the organizations toplevel organizational units, groups, users, and objects. On the menu, click Properties. The Properties screen for the selected organization appears.
2 3
Managing organizational units

You can manage Novell organizational units in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To create an organizational unit
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location where you want to create a new organizational unit. On the menu, select New Organizational Unit. The New Organizational Unit screen appears. In the Name field, enter the name for the new organizational unit.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
2 3 4
182
Managing Novell (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing organizational units
On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new organizational unit was saved.
To view an organizational unit

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location where you want to view an organizational unit, and then scroll to the organizational unit that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected organizational unit appears.
2 3
To view or editing organizational unit properties

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location where you want to view an organizational unit, and then scroll to the organizational unit that you want to view or edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected organizational unit appears. On the menu, click Properties. The Properties screen for the selected organizational unit appears. To edit the organizational unit properties, change the following fields as required: Other Name type an alternate name for the organizational unit Location type the location of the organizational unit Telephone type the telephone number of the organizational unit Fax Number type the fax number of the organizational unit Description type a description of the organizational unit On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3 4 5
To rename an organizational unit

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location where you want to view an organizational unit, and then scroll to the organizational unit that you want to view or edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected organizational unit appears. On the menu, click Properties. The Properties screen for the selected organizational unit appears. On the menu, click Rename. The Rename screen appears.
2 3 4 5
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
183
Managing Novell (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing users and groups
6 7
In the New Name field, type the new name for the organizational unit. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To delete an organizational unit

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location where you want to view an organizational unit, and then scroll to the organizational unit that you want to view or edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected organizational unit appears. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected organizational unit. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the organizational unit was deleted.
2 3 4
Managing users and groups

You can manage Novell users and groups in Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To create a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location where you want to create a new user. On the menu, select New User. The New User screen appears. Complete the following fields: Name type the first name of the user Surname type the surname of the user Unique ID type a unique identifier for the user Password type a password for the user Retype Password type the password for the user a second time to confirm it On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new user was saved.
2 3 4
To view or edit a user

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
184
2 3 4
Browse to the location of the user you want to view or edit. Scroll to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears. To edit the user properties, complete or change the following fields, as required: Given Name type the users first name Last Name type the users last name Full Name type the users full name Qualifier type any qualifiers that apply to the users name (for example: Sr., Jr., III) Middle Initial type the users middle initial Other Name type an alternate name for the user Title type the users title Location type the location of the user Department type the department of the user Telephone type the telephone number of the user Fax Number type the fax number of the user E-Mail Address type the email address for the user Description type a description of the user On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To rename a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the user you want to rename. Scroll to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Rename. The Rename screen appears. In the New Name field, type the new name for the user. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3 4 5 6
To delete a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the user you want to delete. Scroll to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the user. Click Yes.
2 3 4 5
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
185
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was deleted. To change user password settings Use this procedure to enable or disable a user account, enable or disable the users ability to change their password, or to set a new password for a user.
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the user whose password settings you want to change. Scroll to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Restrictions. The Restrictions screen appears. Do the following, as required:
If Then
2 3 4 5
you want to enable a disabled user account you want to disable an enabled user account you want to allow the user to change their password you want to disallow the user from changing their password you want to set a new password for the user
6
clear the Account Disabled check box. select the Account Disabled check box. select the Allow Change Password check box clear the Allow Change Password check box type a new password in the New Password field. In the Retype Password field, type the new password a second time to confirm it.
To change a user logon script

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the user whose logon script you want to edit. Scroll to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Logon Script. The Logon Script screen for the selected user appears. Type the changes to the users logon script. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3 4 5 6
186
Mobile Admin v. 5.1

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the user that you want to add to a group. Scroll to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Group Membership. The Group Membership screen for the selected user appears, and displays a list of all the groups that the user currently belongs to. On the menu, click Add. The Add Membership screen appears for the selected user. In the Object Name field, type the name of the group you want to add the user to. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was added to the group.
2 3 4
5 6 7

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the user that you want to remove from a group. Scroll to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected user appears. On the menu, click Group Membership. The Group Membership screen for the selected user appears, and displays a list of all the groups that the user currently belongs to. Scroll to the group that you want to remove the user from. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the member from the selected group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was removed from the group.
2 3 4
To create a group
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location where you want to create a new group. On the menu, select New Group. The New Group screen appears. In the Name field, type the name of the new group. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the new group was saved. Close the message window.
2 3 4 5 6
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The Properties screen for the new group appears.

7
Complete the following fields, as required: Owner type the name of the owner of the group Location type the location of the group Department type the department that the group belongs to Organization type the name of the organization that the group belongs to Description type a description of the group On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To view or edit a group

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the group you want to view or edit. Scroll to the group. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected group appears. To edit the group, complete or change the following fields, as required: Owner type the name of the owner of the group Location type the location of the group Department type the department that the group belongs to Organization type the name of the organization that the group belongs to Description type a description of the group On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3 4
To rename a group
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the group you want to rename. Scroll to the group. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click Rename. The Rename screen appears. In the New Name field, type a new name for the group. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
2 3 4 5 6
To delete a group
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
188

2 3 4 5
Browse to the location of the group you want to delete. Scroll to the group. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the group was deleted.

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the group you want to add a user to. Scroll to the group you want to add a user to. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears and displays all the users that belong to the selected group. On the menu, click Add. The Add Member screen appears. In the Object Name field, type the name of the user that you want to add to the group. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was added to the group.
2 3 4 5 6 7

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon. The Novell Console screen appears. Browse to the location of the group you want to remove a user from. Scroll to the group. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen for the selected group appears. On the menu, click Members. The Members screen appears and displays all the users that belong to the selected group. Scroll to the user that you want to remove from the group. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the user from the group. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was removed from the group.
2 3 4 5 6
To search for an object (user or group) Use this procedure to search an entire organization, or to search organizational units for a specific user or group.
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Novell Console icon.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1

2 3 4
Browse to the location where you want to search for an object. On the menu, click Find. The Find In screen appears. Complete the following fields: Name type the name, or part of the name of the object that you want to search for Object Type from the drop-down menu, select the type of object you want to search for On the menu, click Find. The Find Results screen appears.
190
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage a BlackBerry Enterprise Server and the Mobile Data Service (MDS).
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server that has a BlackBerry Enterprise Server to manage from your Manage Servers list, or selected the BlackBerry Enterprise Server service from the Manage Services list.
Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server

You can manage the BlackBerry Enterprise Server with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected. To view a list of BlackBerry Enterprise Servers From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the BlackBerry Manager icon. The BlackBerry Servers on selected server screen appears and lists the BlackBerry Enterprise Server instances available on the selected server.
To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server Use this procedure to view details for a specific BlackBerry Enterprise Server instance. Details include the status for the Server and Server Relay Protocol (SRP), the number of users, the number of forwarded, sent, pending, filtered and expired emails, and whether or not the MDS is enabled.
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the BlackBerry Manager icon. The BlackBerry Servers on selected server screen appears and lists the BlackBerry Enterprise Server instances available on the selected server. Scroll to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server that you want to view the status for. On the menu, click Select. The BES screen appears and displays detailed information for the selected BlackBerry Enterprise Server.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
191
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server
To stop the Mobile Data Service

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the BlackBerry Manager icon. The BlackBerry Servers screen appears and lists the BlackBerry Enterprise Server servers available on the selected server. Scroll to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server where you want to stop MDS. On the menu, click Select. The BES screen appears and displays detailed information for the selected BlackBerry Enterprise Server. On the menu, click Stop Mobile Data Service. Mobile Admin displays a warning message. If you are about to stop MDS on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server that your device is currently associated with, you will not be able to start MDS from the device after you have stopped it. You will have to restart it manually at the physical location of the BlackBerry Enterprise Server, or with a device running Mobile Admin that is associated with another BlackBerry Enterprise Server. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the MDS was stopped.
Note
To restart the Mobile Data Service

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the BlackBerry Manager icon. The BlackBerry Servers screen appears and lists the BlackBerry Enterprise Server servers available on the selected server. Scroll to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server where you want to restart MDS. On the menu, click Select. The BES screen appears and displays detailed information for the selected BlackBerry Enterprise Server. On the menu, click Restart Mobile Data Service. Mobile Admin displays a warning message. If you are about to restart MDS on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server that your device is currently associated with, Mobile Admin will be temporarily unavailable. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the MDS was restarted.
To enable or disable the Mobile Data Service for a user

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the BlackBerry Manager icon. The BlackBerry Servers screen appears and lists the BlackBerry Enterprise Server servers available on the selected server. Scroll to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server that manages the user that you want to enable or disable MDS for. On the menu, click Select.
192
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing users
The BES screen appears and displays detailed information for the selected BlackBerry Enterprise Server.
3 4 5
On the menu, click Users. The Users screen appears. Scroll to the user that you want to enable or disable MDS for. On the menu, click Select. The User Info screen appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want to enable MDS you want to disable MDS
click Enable Mobile Data Service. click Disable Mobile Data Service.
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that MDS was enabled or disabled for the selected user.
Managing users
You can manage BlackBerry users on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server with Mobile Admin. To view a list of users
1 2
Follow the procedure To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server on page 191 On the menu, click List users. The Users screen appears and lists all the users.
To search for a user

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server on page 191 On the menu, click Find users. The Find users screen appears. In the User Name field, enter the name of the user. You can enter any part of the name or all of the users name. You must enter enough of the name that the system will be able to recognize it as unique to the user you are attempting to identify. If Mobile Admin can find the name on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server, the record for the selected user appears. If Mobile Admin cannot find the name, no search results will appear.
To view details for a known user

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server on page 191. On the menu, click Find users. The Find users screen appears. In the User Name field, enter the name of the user. You can enter any part of the name or all of the users name. You must enter enough of the name that the system will be able to recognize it as unique to the user you are attempting to identify.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
193
If Mobile Admin can find the name on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server, the record for the selected user appears. If Mobile Admin cannot find the name, no search results will appear. To add a user
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of users on page 193. On the menu, click Add. The Add User screen appears. Complete the following fields: User Name Type a user name for the new user. PIN Type a PIN for the new user. Activation Password Type a password for the new user that they must enter the first time they log in to their BlackBerry.
To delete a user
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of users on page 193. Scroll to the user that you want to delete. On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected user. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user has been deleted.
To clear user statistics

Note
1 2 3 4
You can only perform this procedure on a BlackBerry Enterprise Server version 4.0. Follow the procedure To view a list of users on page 193. Scroll to the user whose statistics you want to clear. On the menu, click Select. The User Info screen appears. On the menu, click Clear Stats. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to clear the selected users statistics. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user statistics were cleared.
To lock a wireless device and set a new user password

Note
You can only perform this procedure on a BlackBerry Enterprise Server version 4.0. Use this procedure to lock a wireless device and set a new user password that must be entered to unlock it. When you lock a device, no information or functionality on the device can be accessed until the new user password is entered.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of users on page 193. Scroll to the user whose device you want to lock and set a password for. On the menu, click Select.
194
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The User Info screen appears.

3 4
On the menu, click Set Password and Lock. The Set Password and Lock screen appears. Complete the following fields: New Password type the new password New Password Again type the new password again to confirm Click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user password was set and the device was locked.
To set the owner information to be displayed on a wireless device

Note
You can only perform this procedure on a BlackBerry Enterprise Server version 4.0. Owner information can be viewed on a device when it is locked. Owner information can be used to identify the owner of the device and to provide information regarding how to return it if it is lost.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of users on page 193. Scroll to the user who you want to set owner information for. On the menu, click Select. The User Info screen appears. On the menu, click Set Owner Info. The Set Owner Info screen appears. Complete the following fields: Owner Name type the name of the owner of the device as you want it to appear on the device Owner Information type owner information, such as how to contact the owner in case the device is lost On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the owner information was saved and uploaded to the device.
To kill a device
Note
You can only perform this procedure on a BlackBerry Enterprise Server version 4.0. Use this procedure to kill a wireless device. When you kill a device, all data on the device is erased, including Mobile Admin login information, and the device is disabled.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of users on page 193. Scroll to the user whose wireless device you want to kill. On the menu, click Select. The User Info screen appears. On the menu, click Kill Handheld. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to kill the selected users wireless device, which will disable the device and delete all information on it. Click Yes.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the wireless device was killed.
To set an activation password

Note
You can only perform this procedure on a BlackBerry Enterprise Server version 4.0. Use this procedure to set an activation password for a wireless device. A user must enter an activation password the first time that they start up their wireless device when it is new, or if it needs to be reactivated after being killed.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of users on page 193. Scroll to the user who you want to set an activation password for. On the menu, click Select. The User Info screen appears. On the menu, click Set Activation Password. The Set Activation Password screen appears. Complete the following fields: Activation Password type the new activation password Confirm Password type the activation password again to confirm On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the activation password was saved and uploaded to the device.
3 4
196
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 and the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service.
Note
In order for Mobile Admin to manage BES 5, the BlackBerry Administration API must be installed on a computer from which the BES 5 server is visible. All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server running the BlackBerry Administration API from your Manage Servers list, or selected the BlackBerry Enterprise Server service from the Manage Services list.
Note
Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5

You can manage the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 with Mobile Admin on the server you have selected.
Note
If the BlackBerry Administration Service is listening on a port other than the default, you must configure the non-standard port in Mobile Admin.
To set a non-standard BlackBerry Administration Service port

1 2 3 4
Log in to Mobile Admin. The home screen appears. Select the server you want to access through the Manage Servers screen. Select Server Properties on the menu. The Server Properties for servername page opens. In the BAS port (0 for default) field, enter the port that the BAS service is listening on, then select Save. The Saved Server Properties screen opens. Select Save on the menu. The Saved server properties dialog box appears. Select OK.
5 6
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
197
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5
The updated Manage servername page opens.

Note
The port can also be configured when adding BlackBerry Administration Service to your Manage Services list.
To view a list of BlackBerry Enterprise Servers From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the BlackBerry Administration Service icon. The BlackBerry Servers on selected server screen appears, and lists the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5instances available on the selected server.
To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 Follow this procedure to view details for a specific BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 instance.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of BlackBerry Enterprise Servers on page 198. Scroll to the server for which you want to view details, then select Select on the menu. The BES Details screen appears, displaying detailed information for the selected BlackBerry Enterprise Server. Managing the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service
Note
Mobile Admin must be managing the machine on which the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service is located in order to perform the following procedures.
To start the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of BlackBerry Enterprise Servers on page 198. Scroll to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 on which you want to start the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service. Select Start BlackBerry Dispatcher Service on the menu. The Start BlackBerry Dispatcher Service menu item only appears if the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service has been stopped. The Started BES screen opens.
Note
Select OK. The BlackBerry Dispatcher Service is started. Refresh the screen in order to display current BES 5 details.
To stop the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of BlackBerry Enterprise Servers on page 198. Scroll to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 on which you want to stop the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service. Select Stop BlackBerry Dispatcher Service on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
198
Managing BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing users
Mobile Admin displays a warning message.

Warning If you stop the BlackBerry Enterprise Server on which your device is running, you will be
unable to use Mobile Admin until you manually restart the server. Before proceeding, please ensure that you want to stop the BES. Click OK. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the server was stopped.
To restart the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service

1 2
Scroll to the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 on which you want to restart the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service. Select Restart BlackBerry Dispatcher Service on the menu. Mobile Admin displays a warning message. If you are about to restart MDS on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server that your device is currently associated with, Mobile Admin will be temporarily unavailable. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the BlackBerry Dispatcher Service was restarted.
Managing users
You can manage BlackBerry users on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 with Mobile Admin. To find a user
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 on page 198 Select Find users on the menu. The Find Users screen appears. In the User Name and/or Email address fields, enter the name/email address of the user. You can enter any part of the users name/email address. You must enter enough information that the system will be able to recognize it as unique to the user you are attempting to identify. If Mobile Admin can find the name on the BlackBerry Enterprise Server, the record for the selected user appears. If Mobile Admin cannot find the name, no search results will appear. The maximum number of users returned for a search is 100.
Note
To view details for a user

1 2
Follow the procedure To find a user on page 199. Select the user for whom you want to view details.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
199
The User Info screen opens, displaying user details.

Note
If a user has been disabled, an abbreviated list of actions appears on the menu.
To add a user
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Follow the procedure To view details for a BlackBerry Enterprise Server 5 on page 198. Select Add user on the menu. The Create BlackBerry Enabled User screen opens. Fill in the Messaging server display name and Email address fields, then select Search. The Users List screen opens, displaying a list of users fitting the search criteria. Select the user you want to add. The Available BlackBerry Enterprise Server Instances screen opens. Select the BES5 to which you want to add the user. The Add User screen opens. Fill in the Activation Password and Confirm Password fields or click in the Create user without activation password check-box, then fill in the Expiry Time (hours) field. Select Save. The Successfully Added User page opens. Select OK.
To set an activation password Use this procedure to set an activation password for a device. A user must enter an activation password the first time that they start up their wireless device when it is new, or if it needs to be reactivated after being killed.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Set Activation Password on the menu. The Set Activation Password screen appears. Fill in the Activation Password, Confirm Password and Expiry Time (hours) fields, then select Save. The Activation Password Saved screen opens. Select OK.
To disable a user
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Disable as BlackBerry User on the menu. The Disable As BlackBerry User screen opens. If desired, click in the Remove the BlackBerry information from the users mail system check-box. Select Disable as BlackBerry User. The Successfully Disabled User screen opens. Select OK. The User Info screen opens.
200
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To delete a user
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To disable a user on page 200, or if the user has already been disabled, follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Delete on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to delete this user. Select OK. The Deleted User screen opens. Select OK.
To lock a wireless device and set a new user password Use this procedure to lock a wireless device and set a new user password that must be entered to unlock it. When you lock a device, no information or functionality on the device can be accessed until the new user password is entered.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Set Password and Lock on the menu. The Set Password and Lock screen opens. Enter the required information in the Password and Confirm Password fields, then select Set Password and Lock. Click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user password was set and the device was locked.
To set the owner information to be displayed on a wireless device Owner information can be viewed on a wireless when it is locked. Owner information can be used to identify the owner of the wireless device and to provide information regarding how to return it if it is lost.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Set Owner Info on the menu. The Set Owner Info screen appears. Enter the required information in the Owner Name and Owner Information fields. Select Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the owner information was saved and uploaded to the device.
To kill a device Follow this procedure to kill a wireless device. When you kill a device, all data on the device is erased, including Mobile Admin login information, and the device is disabled.
1 2
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. On the menu, select Kill Handheld. The Erase Data and Disable Handheld screen opens.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
201
Enter the required information in the Delay Time (in minutes) field, then select Kill Handheld. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to kill the selected users device, which will disable the device and delete all information on it. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the device was killed.
To cancel a device kill Follow this procedure to cancel a kill for a device. This menu option will only appear if a device kill is pending.
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Cancel Kill Handheld on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you if youre sure you want to cancel the kill handheld command. Select OK. The device kill has been cancelled.
To disable BlackBerry service for a user

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Disable as BlackBerry User on the menu. The Disable As BlackBerry User screen opens. If desired, click in the Remove the BlackBerry information from the users mail system check box, then select Disable as BlackBerry User. The Successfully Disabled User screen opens. Select OK. The User Info screen opens displaying user info.
To move a user You can move a user from one instance of a BES 5 to another.
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Move User on the menu. The Move User screen opens displaying a list of BES 5 instances to where you can move the user. Select the BES 5 instance to where you want to move the user. The Moved BES User screen opens. Select OK.
To set a users IT policy

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select IT Policy on the menu. The Set User IT Policy screen opens. Scroll to the IT Policy you want to set for the user, and select it. The IT Policy Set screen opens. Select OK.
202
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To detach a users IT policy

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Detach IT Policy on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you if youre sure you want to detach the IT policy. Select OK.
To generate an activation password for a user

1 2
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Generate Activation Password on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you if youre sure you want to generate an activation password for the user. Select OK. The Activation Password Set screen opens. Select OK.
3 4
To clear an activation password for a user

1 2
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Clear Activation Password on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you if youre sure you want to clear the activation password for the user. Select OK. The The Activation Password Cleared screen opens. Select OK.
3 4
To resend a users service book

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199. Select Resend Service Book on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm resending service book. Select OK. The Service Book Sent screen opens. Select OK.
To set software configuration for a user

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199 Select Set Software Configuration on the menu. The Set User Software Configuration screen opens. Select the appropriate item from the list. A dialog box appears indicating the software configuration has been set for the user. Select OK. The User Info screen appears and contains the software configuration information.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
203
To detach software configuration information for a user

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view details for a user on page 199 Select Detach Software Configuration on the menu. The Detach User Software Configuration screen opens. Select the appropriate item from the list. A dialog box appears indicating the software configuration has been detached for the user. Select OK. The User Info screen appears without the software configuration information.
204
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing databases
Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Oracle servers.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server that hosts Oracle from your Manage Servers list, or selected the Oracle service from the Manage Services list.
Managing databases
You can manage Oracle databases with Mobile Admin. To add a database
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. On the menu, click Add Database. The Add Database screen appears. In the Database SID field, type the name of the system identifier (SID) for the database. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the database was added.
2 3 4
To remove a database
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to delete. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the data source was deleted.
Managing instances and sessions

You can manage Oracle server instances and sessions with Mobile Admin.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
205
Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing schemas
To view instance configurations

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Instance. On the menu, click Select. The Instance screen appears. Scroll to Configuration. On the menu, click Select. The Configuration screen appears and displays configuration information for the selected instance.
2 3 4
To view session information

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Instance. On the menu, click Select. The Instance screen appears. Scroll to Sessions. On the menu, click Select. The Sessions screen appears and displays a list of sessions for the selected instance. Scroll to the session that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Session screen appears and displays information about the selected session.
2 3 4 5
To kill a session
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view session information on page 206 and view the session details for the session you want to kill. On the menu, click Kill Session. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to kill the session. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that they session was killed.
Managing schemas
You can manage Oracle server schemas with Mobile Admin, including tables, views, sequences and procedures. To view information for a schema
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
206
2 3
Scroll to the database that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Schema. On the menu, click Select. The Schema screen appears.
To view columns and statistics for a table

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Tables. On the menu, click Select. The Tables screen appears and displays a list of tables for the selected schema. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want to view column information you want to view table statistics Mobile Admin displays the selected information.
on the menu, click Columns. on the menu, click Statistics
To remove a table
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Tables. On the menu, click Select. The Tables screen appears and displays a list of tables for the selected schema. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected table. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the table was removed.
To view a view
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Views. On the menu, click Select. The Views screen appears and displays a list of views for the selected schema. Scroll to the view you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The View screen for the selected view appears.
To create a view
1 2
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Views. On the menu, click Select. The Views screen appears and displays a list of views for the selected schema.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
207
3 4
On the menu, click Create. The Create View screen appears. Complete the following fields: Name Type a name for the view. Schema Displays the name of the schema. Query Text Type the query text to identify the columns and rows of the table(s) that the view is based on. Aliases Type the synonyms for the view. Replace if Exists Select this check box to indicate that a trigger is to be recreated (if it already exists) without dropping, recreating and regenerating object privileges previously granted. On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the view was created.
To edit a view
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Views. On the menu, click Select. The Views screen appears and displays a list of views for the selected schema. Scroll to the view you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The View screen for the selected view appears. Edit the fields as required. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the view was applied.
To remove a view
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Views. On the menu, click Select. The Views screen appears and displays a list of views for the selected schema. Scroll to the view you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The View screen for the selected view appears. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected view. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the view was removed.
To view a sequence
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Sequences. On the menu, click Select. The Sequences screen appears and displays a list of sequences for the selected schema. Scroll to the sequence you want to view. On the menu, click Select.
208
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The Sequence screen for the selected sequence appears. To create a sequence
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Sequences. On the menu, click Select. The Sequences screen appears and displays a list of sequences for the selected schema. On the menu, click Create. The Create Sequence screen appears. Complete the following fields: Name Type a name for the sequence. Schema Displays the name of the schema. Type Select Ascending to create a sequence where values increase from the initial value towards the maximum value. Select Descending to create a sequence where values decrease from the initial value towards the minimum value. Minimum Type the minimum allowed value of the sequence. Maximum Type the maximum value of the sequence. Interval Type the interval by which the sequence increases or decreases. Initial Type the starting value of the sequence. Cycle Values When selected, the sequence will continue to generate values after reaching its minimum or maximum value. Order Values When selected, the sequence numbers will be generated in order of request. Cache Select Default to use the default value of 20. Select No Cache to specify that the values of the sequence not be pre-allocated. Select Size to enter a cache size value. For sequences that cycle, this value must be less than the number of values in the cycle. If the maximum number of values the sequence can generate is less than the cache size, the cache size will be automatically changed to the maximum number of possible values. Cache Size Type the number of values to be pre-allocated and stored by the database. On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the sequence was created.
To edit a sequence
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Sequences. On the menu, click Select. The Sequences screen appears and displays a list of sequences for the selected schema. Scroll to the view you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Sequence screen for the selected sequence appears. Edit the fields as required. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the sequence was applied.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
209
To remove a sequence
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Sequences. On the menu, click Select. The Sequences screen appears and displays a list of sequences for the selected schema. Scroll to the sequence you want to remove. On the menu, click Select. The Sequence screen for the selected sequence appears. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected sequence. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the sequence was removed.
To view a stored procedure

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Source Types. On the menu, click Select. The Source Types screen appears and displays a list of source types for the selected schema. Scroll to Procedures. On the menu, click Select. The Procedures screen appears. Scroll to the procedure that you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The Procedure screen for the selected procedure appears.
To create a stored procedure

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Source Types. On the menu, click Select. The Source Types screen appears and displays a list of source types for the selected schema. Scroll to Procedures. On the menu, click Select. The Procedures screen appears. On the menu, click Create. The Create Procedure screen appears. Complete the following fields: Name Type a name for the sequence. Schema Displays the name of the schema. Source Type the source. On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the sequence was created.
To edit a stored procedure

1
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use.
210
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing security
2 3 4 5
Scroll to Source Types. On the menu, click Select. The Source Types screen appears and displays a list of source types for the selected schema. Scroll to Procedures. On the menu, click Select. The Procedures screen appears. Scroll to the procedure you want to apply. On the menu, click Select. The Procedure screen for the selected procedure appears. Edit the fields as required. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the procedure was applied.
To remove a stored procedure

1 2 3 4 5 6
Follow the procedure To view information for a schema on page 206 and select the schema you want to use. Scroll to Source Types. On the menu, click Select. The Source Types screen appears and displays a list of source types for the selected schema. Scroll to Procedures. On the menu, click Select. The Procedures screen appears. Scroll to the procedure you want to remove. On the menu, click Select. The Procedure screen for the selected procedure appears. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected procedure. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the procedure was removed.
Managing security
You can manage Oracle server security with Mobile Admin, including users, roles, and profiles. To view users
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to use. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Security. On the menu, click Select. The Security screen appears. Scroll to Users. On the menu, click Select. The Users screen appears and displays the registered users of the database.
2 3 4
To create a user
1
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
211
2 3
On the menu, click Create. The Create User screen appears. Complete the following fields: Username Type a name for the user. Password Type a password for the user. Confirm Password Retype the password. Expire Password Now Select this check box to force the user to change their password upon login. Profile Choose from the existing profiles. Default Tablespace Choose from the existing tablespaces. Temporary Tablespace Choose from the existing tablespaces. On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user was created.
To edit a user
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for the selected user. Edit the following fields as required: Profile Select a profile from the available profiles. Status Select Unlocked to unlock the user. Select Locked to lock the user. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
To remove a user
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for the selected user. On the menu, click Remove User. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected user. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the user has been removed.
To reset a password
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose password you want to reset. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for the selected user. On the menu, click Reset Password. The Reset Password screen appears. Complete the following fields: Password type a new password for the user
212
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Confirm Password retype the new password Expire Password Now select this check box to force the user to change their
password upon login On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the password has been reset.
To view the roles granted to a user

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for the selected user. On the menu, click Role. Mobile Admin displays the roles that have been granted to the selected user.
To add a new role to a user

1 2 3 4 5 6
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for the selected user. On the menu, click Role. Mobile Admin displays the roles that have been granted to the selected user. On the menu, click Add. The Available screen appears and displays roles available to be granted to the user. Scroll to the role that you want to grant to the user. On the menu, click Select. The Role Options screen appears. Choose from the following as required: Default Select this check box to grant the user the default settings for the selected role. Admin Option Select this check box to grant the user the admin settings for the selected role. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to indicate that the change has been saved.
To revoke a role that has been granted to a user

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for the selected user. On the menu, click Role. Mobile Admin displays the roles that have been granted to the selected user. Scroll down to the role that you want to revoke. On the menu click Revoke. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to revoke this role for this user. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the role has been revoked for this user.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
213
To view the system privileges that have been granted to a user

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for this user. On the menu, click System. Mobile Admin displays the system privileges that have been granted to the selected user.
To add system privileges for a user

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for this user. On the menu, click System. Mobile Admin displays the system privileges that have been granted to the selected user. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays a list of system privileges. Scroll to the system privilege that you want to grant to the user. On the menu, click Grant. Mobile Admin displays the system privilege that has been granted to the selected user.
To revoke system privileges from a user

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view users on page 211. Scroll to the user whose profile you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears for this user. On the menu, click System. Mobile Admin displays the system privileges that have been granted to the selected user. Scroll to the system privilege that you want to revoke. On the menu, click Revoke. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to revoke the selected system privilege for the user. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the system privilege has been revoked for this user.
To view a list of available roles

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to view the roles for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Security. On the menu, click Select. The Security screen appears. Scroll to Roles. On the menu, click Select. The Roles screen appears displaying the defined roles for the database.
2 3 4
214
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To create a role
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. On the menu, click Create. The Create Role screen appears for this role. Complete the following fields: Name Type a name for the role. Authentication Choose from the existing authentications. Password Type a password for the role if you want to require password authentication. Confirm Password Retype the password for the role if you want to require password authentication. On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the role has been created.
To edit a role
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. Scroll to the role you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected role appears. Edit the following fields as required: Authentication Choose from the existing authentications. Password Type a password for the role. Confirm Password Retype the password for the role. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the change has been saved.
To remove a role
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. Scroll to the role you want to remove. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected role appears. On the menu, click Remove Role. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to remove the selected role. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the role has been removed.
To view the system privileges that have been granted to a role

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. Scroll to the role whose system privileges you want to view. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected role appears. On the menu, click System. Mobile Admin displays the system privileges that have been granted to the selected role.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
215
To add additional system privileges to a role

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. Scroll to the role whose system privileges you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected role appears. On the menu, click System. Mobile Admin displays the system privileges that have been granted to the selected role. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays the list of system privileges. Scroll to the system privilege that you want to grant to the role. On the menu, click Grant. Mobile Admin displays the system privilege that has been granted to the selected role.
To revoke system privileges from a role

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. Scroll to the role that you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected role appears. On the menu, click System. Mobile Admin displays the system privileges that have been granted to the selected role. Scroll to the system privilege that you want to revoke. On the menu, click Revoke. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to revoke the selected system privilege for the role. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the system privilege has been revoked for this role.
To add roles to an existing role

1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. Scroll to the role that you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected role appears. On the menu, click Roles. Mobile Admin displays the roles that have been granted to the selected role. On the menu, click Add. Mobile Admin displays the list of available roles. Scroll down to highlight the role that you want to add to the current role. On the menu, click Select. The Role Options Screen appears.
To revoke roles from an existing role

1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of available roles on page 214. Scroll to the role that you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected role appears.
216
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
3 4 5
On the menu, click Roles. Mobile Admin displays the roles that have been granted to the selected role. Scroll to the role you want to revoke. On the menu, click Revoke. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to revoke the role. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the role has been revoked.
To view a list of profiles

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to view the profiles for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Security. On the menu, click Select. The Security screen appears. Scroll to Profiles. On the menu, click Select. The Profiles screen appears, displaying the defined profiles of the database.
2 3 4
To create a profile
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of profiles on page 217. On the menu, click Create. The Create Profile screen appears for this profile. Complete the following fields: Name Type a name for the profile. CPU/Session (Sec./100) Type a limit for the CPU time for a session, in hundredths of a second CPU/Call (Sec./100) Type a limit for the CPU time for a call, in hundredths of a second Connect Time (Minutes) Type a limit for the total elapsed time for a session, in minutes. Idle Time (Minutes) Type a limit for a period of inactive time during a session, in minutes. Concurrent Sessions (Per User) Type a limit to the number of concurrent sessions allowed for a user with this profile. Reads/Session (Blocks) Type a limit for the number of data blocks read in a session, including blocks read from memory and disk. Reads/Call (Blocks) Type a limit for the number of data blocks read for a call to process a SQL statement. Private SGA (Kbytes) Type a limit for the amount of private space a session can allocate in the shared pool of the System Global Area (SGA) to integer bytes. Composite Limit (Service Units) Type a limit for the total resource cost for a session. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the profile has been created.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
217
Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing storage
To remove a profile
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of profiles on page 217. Scroll to the profile that you want to remove. On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the profile. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the profile was removed.
To view or edit a profile

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of profiles on page 217. Scroll to the profile you want to edit. Click Select. The screen for the selected profile appears. Edit the fields as required. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes have been saved.
To edit the password policies of a profile

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of profiles on page 217. Scroll to the profile you want to change the password policies for. Click Select. The screen for the selected profile appears. On the menu, click Password. The Profile-Password screen appears. Edit the following fields as required, using the valid values of Unlimited, Default, or any numeric value: Expire in (days) Type the number of days after which the password will expire. Lock (days past expiration) Type the number of days after which an expired password will result in the profile becoming locked. Keep (passwords) Type the number of passwords that can be stored. Keep for (days) Type the number of days that stored passwords will be kept. Complexity function Type the value for the level of complexity required in the password. Lock after (failed logon attempts) Type the failed logon attempts that are required before the profile becomes locked. Lock for (days) Type how long the password will be locked for. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the change has been saved.
Managing storage
You can manage Oracle server storage with Mobile Admin, including tablespaces and datafiles.
218
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To view a list of tablespaces

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you wish to view the datafiles for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Storage. On the menu, click Select. The Storage screen appears. Scroll to Tablespaces. On the menu, click Select. The Tablespaces screen appears and displays the defined tablespaces of the database.
2 3 4
To create a tablespace
1
Follow the procedure To view a list of tablespaces on page 219. On the menu, click Create. The Create Tablespace screen appears for the selected database. Complete the following fields: Name Type a name for the tablespace. Datafile Name Specify the data file or files to comprise the tablespace. Datafile Size Type the size in bytes of the next increment of disk space to be allocated to the datafile when more extents are required. Status Select Online or Offline. Type Select Permanent, Temporary, or Undo. Set as Default Temporary Tablespace Select this check box to set this tablespace as the default temporary tablespace. Segment Space Management Select Automatic or Manual. Enable Logging Select Yes to enable logging that will generate redo and recovery logs. Select No for faster updates without redo logs. On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the tablespace has been created.
To edit a tablespace
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of tablespaces on page 219. Scroll to the tablespace you want to edit. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the selected tablespace. Mobile Admin displays the valid values for this parameter. Edit the fields as required. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes have been saved.
To remove a tablespace
1 2
Follow the procedure To view a list of tablespaces on page 219. Scroll to the tablespace you want to remove. On the menu, click Select.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
219
Mobile Admin displays the selected tablespace.

3 4
On the menu, click Remove. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the selected tablespace. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the tablespace has been removed.
To view a list of datafiles

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you wish to view the datafiles for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to Storage. On the menu, click Select. The Storage screen appears. Scroll to Tablespaces. On the menu, click Select. The Tablespaces screen appears and displays the defined tablespaces of the database. On the menu, click Datafiles. Mobile Admin displays the datafiles for the selected tablespace.
2 3 4 5
To create a datafile
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a list of datafiles on page 220. On the menu, click Create. The Create Datafile screen appears. Complete the following fields: Name - create a name for the new datafile. Tablespace - by default, Mobile Admin will populate this field with the tablespace that you are currently in. File Size (MB) - enter the maximum size of the datafile in megabytes. Reuse Existing File On the menu, click Create. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the datafile has been created.
To edit a datafile
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a list of tablespaces on page 219 Scroll to the tablespace that you want to see the datafiles for. On the menu, click Select. The Tablespace screen appears displaying the parameters of the selected tablespace. On the menu, click Datafiles. Mobile Admin displays the datafiles for the selected tablespace. Edit the fields as required. On the menu, click Apply. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the datafile has been changed.
220
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Running SQL queries
Running SQL queries

To run a SQL query
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Oracle Enterprise Manager icon. The Databases screen appears. Scroll to the database that you want to run an SQL query on. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected database appears. Scroll to SQL Prompt. On the menu, click Select. The SQL Query screen appears. Type the SQL query that you want to run. On the menu, click Send. Mobile Admin displays the results of the query.
2 3 4
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
221
Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Running SQL queries
222
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Citrix (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing Citrix sessions
Managing Citrix (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Citrix servers (Citrix MetaFrame or Presentation Servers).
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server that hosts Citrix from your Manage Servers list, or selected the Citrix service from the Manage Services list.
Managing Citrix sessions

You can manage Citrix sessions with Mobile Admin. To view active Citrix sessions
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions.
To view details for an active Citrix session

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions. Scroll to the session that you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected Citrix session appears. On the menu, click Session Information. The session information for the selected session appears.
2 3 4
To view process information for an active Citrix session

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
223
Managing Citrix (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing Citrix sessions
Scroll to the session that you want to view process information for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected Citrix session appears. On the menu, click Session Processes. Mobile Admin displays the process information for the selected session.
To reset a Citrix session

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions. Scroll to the session that you want to reset. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected Citrix session appears. On the menu, click Reset. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to reset the selected session. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the session has been reset.
2 3 4 5
To logoff a Citrix session

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions. Scroll to the session that you want to logoff. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected Citrix session appears. On the menu, click Logoff Session. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to logoff the selected session. Click Yes. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the session has been logged off.
2 3 4 5
To disconnect a Citrix session

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions. Scroll to the session that you want to disconnect. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected Citrix session appears. On the menu, click Disconnect Session. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to disconnect the selected session. Click Yes.
2 3 4 5
224
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Citrix (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing Citrix licenses
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the session has been disconnected. To terminate user processes
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions. Scroll to the session that has a user you want to terminate processes for. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected Citrix session appears. On the menu, click Session Processes. The Session Processes screen appears. Scroll to the process that you want to terminate. On the menu, click Terminate. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the process was terminated.
2 3
4 5
To send a message to a Citrix user

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears. Scroll to the Sessions icon. On the menu, click Select. The Citrix Sessions screen appears and displays a list of Citrix sessions. Scroll to the session that has a user you want to send a message to. On the menu, click Select. The screen for the selected Citrix session appears. On the menu, click Send Message. The Send-Message Console appears. In the Message field, type your message. On the menu, click Send. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the message was sent.
2 3
4 5
Managing Citrix licenses

To view Citrix licenses and usage information
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Citrix Management Console icon. The Citrix screen appears and displays the sessions and Licenses icons. Scroll to the Licenses icon. On the menu, click Select. The License Pools screen appears. Scroll to the license pool you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. The License Pool screen appears and displays usage information. To view license details, click License Details on the menu.
2 3 4
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
225
Managing Citrix (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing Citrix licenses
The Licenses screen for the selected license pool appears.

5
Scroll to the license you want to view more details for. On the menu, click Select. The License Details screen appears and displays detailed information about the selected license.
226
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing the RSA Authentication Manager (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing RSA users and tokens
Managing the RSA Authentication Manager (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage the RSA Authentication Manager server.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server that hosts RSA Authentication Manager from your Manage Servers list, or selected the RSA Authentication Manager service from the Manage Services list.
Managing RSA users and tokens

You can manage RSA SecurID users and tokens with Mobile Admin for the server you have selected. To search for a user
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the RSA ACE Administration icon. The RSA ACE Server screen appears. Enter either a user login name in the Login field, or enter a token serial number in the Token Serial field. On the menu, click Find User. The Select User screen appears. Scroll to the user you want to select. On the menu, click Select. The Edit User screen appears and displays information for the selected user.
2 3 4
To view token information

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To search for a user and select the user you want to view token information for. On the menu, click Tokens. The Tokens screen appears and displays the token(s) associated with the selected user. Scroll to the token that you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
227
Managing the RSA Authentication Manager (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing RSA users and tokens
To enable or disable a token

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To search for a user and select the user you want to enable or disable a token for. On the menu, click Tokens. The Tokens screen appears and displays the token(s) associated with the selected user. Scroll to the token that you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. The Edit Token screen appears. Do one of the following:
If Then
you want to enable the token you want to disable the token
5
select the Enabled check box. select the Disabled check box.
To reset an RSA SecurID token into New PIN mode You can reset the RSA SecurID token to New PIN mode for a specific user with Mobile Admin. When you reset a token to New PIN mode, the user will be required to set a new PIN the next time they try to log in using their RSA SecurID token.
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To search for a user and select the user you want to enable or disable a token for. On the menu, click Tokens. The Tokens screen appears and displays the token(s) associated with the selected user. Scroll to the token that you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. The Edit Token screen appears. Select the New PIN Mode check box. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that the changes were saved.
228
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Man agin g HP In teg rat ed L igh ts Ou t (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing iLO servers
Managing HP Integrated Lights Out (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage HP Integrated Lights Out (iLO) servers. Mobile Admin supports iLO firmware version 1.20 and higher. It is recommended that you maintain your iLO firmware at the most current version. Mobile Admin encrypts all data sent between the iLO server and Mobile Admin by using HTTPS for the connection.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server that is equipped with iLO from your Manage Servers list, or selected the iLO service from the Manage Services list.
Managing iLO servers

You can use Mobile Admin to manage iLO servers, including viewing user information, server settings, and logs, as well as turning on or off host power and UID. To view user information
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the iLO icon. The iLO screen appears. On the menu, click User Info. Mobile Admin displays information about the privileges that he current iLO user has.
To view global or network settings

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the iLO icon. The iLO screen appears. On the menu, click Settings. The Settings screen appears. Scroll to the type of settings you would like to view. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the selected settings.
2 3
To view logs or log entry details

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the iLO icon.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Manag ing HP Int egrat ed L igh ts Out (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing iLO servers
The iLO screen appears.

2 3 4
On the menu, click Logs. The Logs screen appears. Scroll to the type of log you would like to view. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the selected type of log. To view details for a specific log entry, scroll to the log entry. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays details about the log entry. To view more log entries than are currently displayed on the screen, click More on the menu.
Note
To view power information

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the iLO icon. The iLO screen appears. On the menu, click Power Control. The Host Power Control screen appears and displays the current state of the host power (on or off).
To turn host power on or off (power down)

Note
When you turn the power off, it does not perform a proper shut down of the operating system of the host computer. Follow the procedure To view power information on page 230. Do one of the following:
If Then
1 2
the power is off and you want to turn it on on the menu, click Turn Host Power On. the power is on and you want to turn it off on the menu, click Turn Host Power Off.
Note
Mobile Admins iLO power operations perform a momentary press of the host power button. The host OS configuration and capabilities determine what actions are performed when the power button is pressed.
To turn UID on or off

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the iLO icon. The iLO screen appears. On the menu, click UID Control. The UID Control screen appears and displays the current state of UID (on or off). Do one of the following:
If Then
2 3
the UID is off and you want to turn it on the UID is on and you want to turn it off
230 Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide
on the menu, click Turn UID On. on the menu, click Turn UID Off.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Man agin g HP In teg rat ed L igh ts Ou t (Mo bile Adm in Prof ession al Only) Managing iLO servers
To enter or change iLO authentication information

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the iLO icon. The iLO screen appears. On the menu, click Authenticate. The Login screen appears. Complete the following fields as required: Login Name Type the username that you want to use for the iLO server. Password Type the password that is associated with the user name you have entered.
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
231
Manag ing HP Int egrat ed L igh ts Out (Mo bile A dmi n Prof ession al Only) Managing iLO servers
232
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the Backup Exec server
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Veritas (now Symantec) Backup Exec servers, version 10d. The Mobile Admin user must be in the Administrators group of the Backup Exec host computer. For example, if the user logs into Mobile Admin as sample\user, then sample\user must be in the Administrators group on the Backup Exec host computer.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a server that hosts BackupExec 10d from your Manage Servers list, or selected the BackupExec 10d service from the Manage Services list.
Managing the Backup Exec server

You can use Mobile Admin to manage Backup Exec server settings, such as change authentication settings, start or stop services, or to view the current status or version of the Backup Exec server. To change authentication settings for the Backup Exec server
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. On the menu, click Authenticate. The Backup Exec screen appears with a list of fields. Complete the following fields as required, to specify the name of the database that Backup Exec will use to store all its data: Database Name Type the name of the database to which Backup Exec will write data. Database Instance Name Type the name of the database instance to which Backup Exec will write data. User Name Type the username that you want to use for Backup Exec. Password Type the password that is associated with the user name you have entered.
2 3
To view the current status of Backup Exec services

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
233
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing backup jobs
On the menu, click Services. The Backup Exec Services screen appears and displays the current status of all Backup Exec services.
To start Backup Exec services

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view the current status of Backup Exec services on page 233. On the menu, click Start Services. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to start services. Click Yes.
To stop Backup Exec services

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view the current status of Backup Exec services on page 233. On the menu, click Stop Services. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to stop services. Click Yes.
To view the current version of the Backup Exec server

1 2
Follow the procedure To view the current status of Backup Exec services on page 233. On the menu, click Version. The Version screen appears and displays information about the version of the Backup Exec server.
Managing backup jobs

To view job properties
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Job Setup. On the menu, click Select. The Job Setup screen appears. Scroll to Jobs. On the menu, click Select. A list of jobs appears. Scroll to the job you want to manage. On the menu, click Select.
2 3 4
To view detailed information about a job

1 2
Follow the procedure To view job properties on page 234. On the menu, click Details. The Details screen for the selected job appears.
To view detailed information about the selections for a job

1
Follow the procedure To view job properties on page 234.

Mobile Admin v. 5.1
234
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing job monitors
On the menu, click Selections. The Selections screen for the selected job appears.
To run a job
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view job properties on page 234. On the menu, click Run Now. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to run the job. Click Yes.
To view selection lists

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Job Setup. On the menu, click Select. The Job Setup screen appears. Scroll to Selection Lists. On the menu, click Select. A list of selection lists appears. Scroll to the selection list you want to view. On the menu, click Select. Information about the selected list appears.
2 3 4
Managing job monitors

You can use Mobile Admin to manage current and completed jobs. To view monitor details for a current job
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Job Monitor. On the menu, click Select. The Job Monitor screen appears. Scroll to Current. On the menu, click Select. The Current Jobs screen appears. Scroll to the current job you want to view the monitor for. On the menu, click Select. Details about the current job are displayed.
2 3 4
To delete a current job

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view monitor details for a current job on page 235 On the menu, click Delete. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to delete the current job. Click Yes.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
235
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing active alerts
To run a current job

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view monitor details for a current job on page 235 On the menu, click Run Now. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to run the current job. Click Yes.
To view monitor details for a completed job

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Job Monitor. On the menu, click Select. The Job Monitor screen appears. Scroll to Job History. On the menu, click Select. The Job History screen appears and displays all jobs run in the last 24 hours. Do one of the following:
If Then
2 3 4
you want to view all canceled jobs you want to view all jobs you want to view all jobs run in the last 7 days you want to view all job exceptions you want to view all successful jobs you want to view all failed jobs you want to view all jobs run in the last 24 hours
on the menu, click Canceled. on the menu, click All. on the menu, click Last 7 Days. on the menu, click Exceptions. on the menu, click Successful. on the menu, click Failed. on the menu, click Last 24 Hours.
Mobile Admin displays a list of the selected type of job.

5 6 7
Scroll to job you want to view the details for. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays a list of each time the job was run for the selected type. Scroll to job occurrence you want to view the details for. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays details for the selected occurrence of the job. To see the log file for the selected job occurrence, select Log File on the menu.
Managing active alerts

You can use Mobile Admin to respond to active alerts. To respond to an active alert
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
236
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing devices
2 3 4
Scroll to Active Alerts. On the menu, click Select. The Alerts Total screen appears. Scroll to the type of alert you want to view information for. On the menu, click Select. A list of the selected type of alert appears. Scroll to the alert you want to view. On the menu, click Select. An alert screen appears and displays detailed information about the alert. At the end of the alert details, a list of possible responses appears. To respond to the alert, select the appropriate response from the menu. These include Ignore, Retry, Cancel, No, Yes, and OK. If the alert details are truncated and not all the response options are listed, click Alert Text on the menu to view the complete alert text.
Managing devices
You can use Mobile Admin to manage devices. To view details for stand-alone drives
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Devices. On the menu, click Select. The Devices screen appears. Scroll to Stand-alone Drives. On the menu, click Select. The Drives screen appears. Scroll to the drive you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. The Properties screen appears.
2 3 4
To create an erase media job for a drive

1 2
Follow the procedure To view details for stand-alone drives on page 237. On the menu, click Erase Media. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to create an erase media job for the drive. Click Yes.
To create an eject job for a drive

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view details for stand-alone drives on page 237. On the menu, click Eject. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to create an eject job for the drive. Click Yes.
To create an inventory job for a drive

1 2
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Follow the procedure To view details for stand-alone drives on page 237. On the menu, click Inventory.
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing devices
Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to create an inventory job for the drive.
3
Click Yes.
To view details for a robotic library device

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Devices. On the menu, click Select. The Devices screen appears. Scroll to Robotic Libraries. On the menu, click Select. The Robotic Libraries screen appears, and displays a list of robotic libraries. Scroll to the library you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays details about the selected library, including the drive names, status, date drives were installed, and number of tape slots.
2 3 4
To view details about a drive in a library

1 2
Follow the procedure to To view details for a robotic library device on page 238. Scroll to the drive that you want to view more details for. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays details for the selected drive.
To erase a tape in a library

1 2 3
Follow the procedure to To view details for a robotic library device on page 238. On the menu, click Erase. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm which slot of the library you want to erase. Type the number of the slot. On the menu, click Erase. Mobile Admin erases the slot.
To label a tape in a library

1 2 3
Follow the procedure to To view details for a robotic library device on page 238. On the menu, click Label. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm which slot of the library you want to erase. Type the number of the slot and the label for the slot. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin labels the slot.
To inventory a tape in a library

1 2 3
Follow the procedure to To view details for a robotic library device on page 238. On the menu, click Inventory. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm which slot of the library you want to inventory. Type the number of the slot. On the menu, click Save. Mobile Admin inventories the slot.
238
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing media
To unlock a library
1 2 3
Follow the procedure to To view details for a robotic library device on page 238. On the menu, click Unlock. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to unlock the selected library. Click Yes.
To eject a tape carousel

1 2 3
Follow the procedure to To view details for a robotic library device on page 238. On the menu, click Eject. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to eject the selected library. Click Yes.
To clean a drive in the carousel

1 2 3
Follow the procedure to To view details for a robotic library device on page 238. On the menu, click Clean. Mobile Admin displays a message to confirm that you want to clean the selected drive. Click Yes.
To view details for backup-to-disk folders

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Devices. On the menu, click Select. The Devices screen appears. Scroll to Backup-to-Disk Folders. On the menu, click Select. The Backup-to-Disk Folders screen appears. Scroll to the folder you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select. Mobile Admin displays the details for the selected folder.
2 3 4
Managing media
You can use Mobile Admin to manage devices. To view details for media
1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Backup Exec icon. The Backup Exec screen appears. Scroll to Media. On the menu, click Select. The Media screen appears. Scroll to the type of media you want to view details for. On the menu, click Select.
2 3
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
239
Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing media
240
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing VMware Infrastructure (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing VI servers
Managing VMware Infrastructure (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use Mobile Admin to manage VMware Infrastructure. VMware Infrastructure Client features are emulated within Mobile Admin..
Note
Microsoft Powershell and the VMware vSphere PowerCLI v4.0 must be installed on the same system as Mobile Admin in order to manage VI servers with Mobile Admin. All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a VMware Infrastructure or ESX server from your Manage Servers list, or selected the VMware Infrastructure Client service from the Manage Services list.
Note
Managing VI servers
You can use Mobile Admin to perform the following tasks:
Note
view hosts/clusters in VMware Infrastructure find virtual machines view VM properties edit VM settings view events and event details view tasks and task details view triggered alarms and triggered alarm details view host summaries and manage hosts
Viewing alarms/alarm details and tasks/task details is not supported on ESX servers.
To view data centers/hosts/clusters on VMware Infrastructure From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the VMware Infrastructure Client icon. The server name page opens listing VI server hosts/clusters.
To find a VM
1 2
Follow the procedure To view data centers/hosts/clusters on VMware Infrastructure on page 241. Select Find VM on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
241
Enter the name of the virtual machine you are looking for in the VM name field. Wildcards are supported. Select Find. The Found VMs page opens displaying a list of VMs. Events
Note
4
To view events
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view data centers/hosts/clusters on VMware Infrastructure on page 241. Select the item for which you want to view events. Select Events on the menu. The item name page opens displaying a list of events.
To view event details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view events on page 242. Select the event for which you want to view details. The Event Details page opens displaying event details. Tasks
To view tasks
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view data centers/hosts/clusters on VMware Infrastructure on page 241. Select the item for which you want to view tasks. Select Tasks on the menu. The task name page opens displaying a list of events.
To view task details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view tasks on page 242. Select the task for which you want to view details. The Task details page opens displaying task details. Triggered Alarms
Note
Triggered alarms are viewable only from VMs that are powered on.
To view triggered alarms

1 2
Select the item for which you want to view triggered alarms (VM, cluster or host). Select Triggered Alarms on the menu. The item name page opens displaying a list of triggered alarms.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
242
To view triggered alarm details

1 2
Follow the procedure To view triggered alarms on page 242. Select the triggered alarm for which you want to view details. The Triggered Alarm page opens displaying alarm details. Hosts
To view a host summary

1 2
Access the host for which you want to view the summary. Select Host Summary on the menu. The Summary hostname page opens.
To enter maintenance mode for a host

Note
1 2 3
Maintenance mode can only be entered when all VMs on a host are shut down. Follow the procedure To view a host summary on page 243. Select Enter Maintenance Mode on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to enter maintenance mode for the host. Click OK.
To reboot a host
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a host summary on page 243. Select Reboot on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to reboot the host. Click OK. The Request for Reboot for host name successful page opens. Select OK on the menu.
To shutdown a host
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view a host summary on page 243. Select Shutdown on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to shutdown the host. Click OK. The Request for shutdown for host name successful page opens. Select OK on the menu.
To enter standby mode for a host

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view a host summary on page 243. Select Enter Standby Mode on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to enter standby mode on the host. Click OK.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
243
The Request for enter standby mode for host name successful page opens.
4
Select OK on the menu. Virtual Machines
To view VM properties Select the VM for which you want to view properties. The VM name page opens displaying the VMs settings.
To edit VM settings
1 2 3
Follow the procedureTo view VM properties on page 244. Select Edit Settings on the menu. The Virtual Machine Settings page opens. Edit settings, then select Save. The VMware VI Toolkit (for Windows) has a limitation that prevents the Note field from being saved when empty. Mobile Admin automatically adds a single space to an empty Note field when saving. Select OK.
Note
To manage a VM
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view VM properties on page 244. Select Manage on the menu. The Manage VM name page opens. Continue with any Mobile Admin task for that machine.
To turn on power to a VM
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view VM properties on page 244. Select Power On on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to turn the VM on. Click Yes. The Request for Power On for VM name successful page opens. Select OK on the menu.
To turn off power to a VM

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view VM properties on page 244. Select Power Off on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to turn the VM off. Click OK. The Request for Power Off for VM name successful page opens. Select OK on the menu.
244
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To suspend a VM
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view VM properties on page 244. Select Suspend on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to suspend the VM. Click OK. The Request for Suspend for VM name successful page opens. Select OK on the menu.
To gracefully shut down a VM

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view VM properties on page 244. Select Shut Down Guest on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to shut down the VM. Click OK. The Request for Shut Down Guest for VM name successful page opens. Select OK on the menu.
To gracefully restart a VM
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view VM properties on page 244. Select Restart Guest on the menu. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm if you want to suspend the VM. Click OK. The Request for Restart Guest for VM name successful page opens. Select OK on the menu.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
245
246
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Nagios (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the Nagios application
Managing Nagios (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Nagios.
Managing the Nagios application

With Mobile Admin, you can view information for hosts and services being monitored.
Note
If the address of your Nagios Web Console is not in the format http://[nagioshostname]/nagios, you must set the address within the Mobile Admin interface.
To set the Nagios Web Console Address

1 2 3 4
Log in to Mobile Admin. The home screen appears. Select the server you want to access through the Manage Servers screen. Select Server Properties on the menu. The Server Properties for servername page opens. In the Nagios Web Console Address field, enter the location of your Nagios server, then select Save. The Saved Server Properties screen opens. Select Save on the menu. The Saved server properties dialog box appears. Select OK. The updated Manage servername page opens. The Nagios Web Console Address can also be set when initially adding a Nagios service to the Manage Services screen.
5 6
Note
To access the Nagios application

1
From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Nagios icon. The Nagios Credentials screen opens. Enter your Nagios Web Console credentials in the User name and Password fields, then select Save. The Nagios Tactical Overview screen opens displaying a list of system health statistics.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
247
To search for a host

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Search for Host on the menu. The Search for Host screen opens. Enter the name of the host you are looking for in the Host field, then select Search. Wildcards are supported. The Search Results screen opens, displaying a list of hosts.
Note
To change Nagios credentials

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Change Credentials on the menu. Immediately upon selection of Change Credentials, previous credentials are removed from Mobile Admin. Enter the nagios Web Console credentials in the User name and Password fields, then select Save.
Note
To view service details

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Service Detail on the menu. The Service Status Details For All Hosts screen opens.
To view service state information

1 2
Follow the procedure To view service details on page 248. Select the service for which you want to view state information The Service State Information screen opens.
To manage the host machine

1 2
Follow the procedure To view service state information on page 248. Select Manage Host on the menu Mobile Admin navigates to the server view for that host
To view comments on the service

1 2
Follow the procedure To view service state information on page 248. Select the service for which you want to view comments, then select Comments on the menu. The Service Comments screen opens.
To add a comment about the service

1
248
Follow the procedure To view comments on the service on page 248.

Mobile Admin v. 5.1
2 3
Select Add New Service Comment on the menu. The Add New Service Comment screen opens. Edit the text fields according to your needs, then select Commit. A message appears informing you that your command request was successfully submitted to Nagios for processing. Select OK. The Service Comments screen opens.
To delete a comment
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To view comments on the service on page 248. Select Delete Comment on the menu. A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the comment. Select OK. A confirmation dialog appears. Select OK.
To schedule service downtime

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view service state information on page 248. Select a service, then select Schedule Service Downtime on the menu. The Schedule Downtime screen opens. Enter/select the relevant information in the text fields/drop-down menus, then select Commit. A message appears informing you that your command request was successfully submitted to Nagios for processing. Select OK. The Service State Information screen opens.
To delete a scheduled service downtime occurance

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Downtime on the menu. The Scheduled Downtime screen opens. Select either Scheduled Host Downtime or Scheduled Service Downtime on the menu. Select the scheduled service downtime occurance you want to delete, then select Delete on the menu. A message appears asking you if you are sure you want to delete the scheduled downtime. Select OK. A confirmation dialog appears. Select OK. The Scheduled Service Downtime screen opens.
5 6
To sort service details by status

1 2
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Follow the procedure To view service details on page 248. Select Sort By Status on the menu.
The Service Status Details For All Hosts screen opens. To sort service details by service
1 2
Follow the procedure To view service details on page 248. Select Sort By Service on the menu. The Service Status Details For All Hosts screen opens.
To view service problems

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Service Problems on the menu. The Service Status Details For All Hosts screen opens.
To view unhandled service problems

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Unhandled Service Problems on the menu. The Service Status Details For All Hosts screen opens.
To view host state information

1 2
Follow the procedure To view service details on page 248. Select a service, then select Show Host State on the menu. The Host State Information screen opens, displaying host state information.
To view host details

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Host Detail on the menu. The Host Status Details For All Host Groups screen opens.
To view host state information

1 2
Follow the procedure To view host details on page 250. Select the host for which you want to view state information. The Host State Information screen opens.
To manage the host machine

1 2
Follow the procedure To view host state information on page 250. Select Manage Host on the menu Mobile Admin navigates to the server view for that host
To view comments on the host machine

1 2
Follow the procedure To view host state information on page 250. Select Comments on the menu. The Host Comments screen opens.
250
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To add a comment about the host machine

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view comments on the host machine on page 250. Select Add New Host Comment on the menu. The Add New Host Comment screen opens. Edit the text fields according to your needs, then select Commit. A message appears informing you that your command request was successfully submitted to Nagios for processing. Select OK. The Host Comments screen opens, displaying your comment.
To schedule host downtime

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To view host state information on page 250. Select Schedule Service Downtime on the menu. The Schedule Downtime screen opens. Enter/select the relevant information in the text fields/drop-down menus, then select Commit. A message appears informing you that your command request was successfully submitted to Nagios for processing. Select OK. The Host State Information screen opens.
To sort host details by status

1 2
Follow the procedure To view host details on page 250. Select Sort By Status on the menu. The Host Status Details For All Host Groups screen opens.
To view host problems

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Host Problems on the menu. The Service Status Details For All Hosts screen opens.
To view unhandled host problems

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Unhandled Host Problems on the menu. The Service Status Details For All Hosts screen opens.
To view service detail information

1 2
Follow the procedure To view host details on page 250. Select a host, then select Show Service Detail on the menu. The Service Status Details screen opens displaying service detail information.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
251
Notifications To view notifications

1 2 3
Follow the procedure To access the Nagios application on page 247. Select Notifications on the menu. The Choose the Notification Detail Level screen opens. Select the level for which you want to view notifications. The Notifications for Host screen opens. If available, select Earlier Archives on the menu to view additional notifications.
Note
252
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing BMC Remedy Service Desk (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the Remedy Service Desk application
Managing BMC Remedy Service Desk (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Remedy Service Desk (RSD).
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a BMC Remedy server from your Manage Servers list, or selected the BMC Remedy Service Desk service from the Manage Services list.
Managing the Remedy Service Desk application

Note
Mobile Admin supports BMC Remedy Service Desk 7.003 and 7.5.001.
To set the BMC Remedy Service Desk port

1 2 3 4
Log in to Mobile Admin. The home screen appears. Select the server you want to access through the Manage Servers screen. Select Server Properties on the menu. The Server Properties for servername page opens. In the Remedy AR Server port (0 for Portmapper) field, enter the port on which the Remedy AR Server is listening (or 0 if the Portmapper is used on the Remedy server), then select Save. The Saved Server Properties screen opens. Select Save on the menu. The Saved server properties dialog box appears. Select OK. The updated Manage servername page opens. The Remedy AR Server port can also be set when initially adding a Remedy Service Desk service to the Manage Services screen.
5 6
Note
To access the Remedy Service Desk application From the Mobile Admin icon, click the Remedy Service Desk icon. The BMC AR Remedy IT System screen appears.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
253
To log in to Remedy Service Desk

1 2 3
From the Mobile Admin icon, click the Remedy Service Desk icon. The Mobile Admin login screen appears. In the Username and Password fields, enter login credentials. Click OK. The Search Incident screen appears.
To log out of Remedy Service Desk Log out of Remedy Service Desk when you are finished a session, or if you want to log in as a different user. On the menu, click Logout.
To search for a Remedy Incident

1
On the Search Incident page, do the following:

If Then
you want to search for an incident assigned to you you want to search for an incident assigned to another user you want to search for incidents based on Company, Priority, or Status you want to search for an incident based on support group you want to search for an incident you have created you want to search for incidents based on Incident ID
Select the Assigned to me check box. The incident(s) assigned to you appears. Clear the Assigned to me check box. The incident(s) assigned to you and/or all others appears. Select the relevant information in the respective drop-down menus. Select a group from the Assigned group drop-down list. Select the Submitted by me check box. In the Incident ID text field, type the number assigned to the incident. You do not need to type the complete Incident number. For example, if you search for incidents containing the number 3, the search returns all incidents that contain the number 3, such as 13, 23, 30, 31.
Click Search. The Search Results page appears.
To view details for a Remedy Incident On the Search Results page, select an Incident. The Incident Request page appears.
254
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
To edit a Remedy Incident

1 2 3
On the Search Results page, click an Incident on the screen. The Incident Request screen appears. Make changes as required and click Save incident. A message appears telling you the incident is saved. Click OK. The Incident request page re-opens, and displays the updated incident.
To change the status of a Remedy Incident

Note
Some status changes require you to indicate a reason for the change; all incident resolutions require a description of how the incident was resolved. On the Incident Request page, click Change Status. The Change status page appears. In the New status field, select the status you want from the drop-down list, click Save and then click OK. A message appears telling you the status is changed.
1 2
To indicate the reason for a change in status

1 2 3 4 5 6
On the Incident Request page, click Change Status. The Change status page appears. In the New status field, select the status you want, and then click Save. In the Change Status Reason page, select a reason from the Reason drop-down list. In the Resolution field, type an explanation describing how the incident was resolved. Click Save. A message appears telling you the status is changed. Click OK. The Incident Request page re-opens and displays the updated Status, Status Reason, and Resolution.
To display Remedy Incident details From the Search Results page, click the entry you want to view. The Incident Request page appears.
To edit an Incident Request

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
On the Incident Request page, change some or all of the following fields:
Notes Type a summary of the event. Impact Select a number/description to define the impact of the incident. Urgency Select a number/description to define the urgency associated with the incident. Incident type Select the type of incident. Reported source Select how the incident was reported. Resolution Type a description of the resolution.
8 9
Click Save incident. A dialog message appears telling you the incident is saved. Click OK.
To reassign an incident
1 2 3 4 5
On the Incident Request page, select Reassign... The Reassign Incident - Support Group page opens. From the Support Group drop-down list, select the group you want to reassign the incident to. Click Next. From the Reassign Incident - Assignee drop-down list, select an assignee from the support group. Click Save.
To view information about the origin of an incident

1 2
On the Incident Request page, select Relationships. A read-only list of related items appears. Click Save.
To modify a resolution date for an incident

1 2 3 4
On the Incident Request page, select Date/System. The Incident Date/System page appears. In the Estimated resolution date field, type a time and date. Click Save. A message appears telling you that the incident has been saved. Click OK.
To create work info

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
On the Incident Request page, click Work Log. The Incident Work Log page appears. Click Create Work Info. The Create Incident Work Info page appears. In the Work info type field, select the appropriate type. In the Date field, type the hour and date for the incident in HH:MM AM/PM DD/MM/YYYY format. In the Source field, select the origin of the information. In the (mandatory) Summary field, type information about the incident. In the Notes field, type any additional information concerning the incident. Click Save. A dialog message appears telling you the incident work info is saved. Click OK.
256
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
The Incident Work Log page reappears and lists the work info you created. To edit work info
1 2 3
On the Incident Work Log page, select the incident you want to view. The Incident Work Info page appears. Make changes as required and click Save. A message appears telling you the incident work info is saved. Click OK. The Incident Work Info page reappears.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
257
258
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing BMC Performance Manager Portal Managing the BMC Portal application
Managing BMC Performance Manager Portal

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage the BMC Performance Manager Portal application.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a BMC Performance Manager Portal server from your Manage Servers list, or selected the Performance Manager Portal service from the Manage Services list.
Managing the BMC Portal application

You can use the BMC Portal application in Mobile Admin to monitor infrastructure elements such as computers and other devices. To access the BMC application From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the BMC Portal icon. The Infrastructure Groups page opens.
To view elements within a group

1 2
Follow the procedure To access the BMC application on page 259. Select the group you want to monitor. The list of elements associated with the group appears.
To list elements
1 2
Follow the procedure To access the BMC application on page 259. Select the group you want to monitor. The list of elements associated with the group appears.
To manage elements
1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the BMC application on page 259. Select the group you want to monitor. The list of elements associated with the group appears. Select an element, and then click Manage Element. The element is opened in Mobile Admin. Select the application you want to monitor. The parameters screen opens.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing BMC Performance Manager Portal Managing the BMC Portal application
To list applications
1 2 3
Follow the procedure To access the BMC application on page 259. Select the group you want to monitor. Select an element. The screen opens displaying the applications belonging to the group.
To view applications for an element

1 2 3 4
Follow the procedure To access the BMC application on page 259. Select the group you want to monitor. Select an element. The screen opens displaying the applications belonging to the element. Select an application. The Application page opens.
To view parameters
1 2 3 4 5
Follow the procedure To access the BMC application on page 259. Select the group you want to monitor. Select an element. The screen opens displaying the applications belonging to the group. Select an application. The Application page opens. Select a parameter. The screen refreshes and displays a state and/or a value for the parameter.
260
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Hyper-V (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the Hyper-V application
Managing Microsoft Hyper-V (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

This chapter provides information about how to use the Mobile Admin Client to manage Microsoft Hyper-V.
Note
All the procedures in this chapter assume that you are logged into Mobile Admin and that you have selected a Hyper-V server from your Manage Servers list, or selected the HyperV service from the Manage Services list
Managing the Hyper-V application

To access the Microsoft Hyper-V application From the Mobile Admin Manage Services screen or from a view of a server reached from the Mobile Admin Manage Servers screen, click the Hyper-V icon. The Virtual Machines screen appears.
To view the summary page On the Virtual Machines page, click the virtual machine whose summary you want to view. The VM Summary page appears and shows information such as Element name, Creation time, State, and so on.
To change the VM state

1 2
On the VM Summary page, click Change state. Click the New state drop-down list and choose one of the following: Start/Resume Turn Off Shut down Pause Reset Save Click Change state.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
261
M anag ing M icroso ft Hyp er -V (Mo bile A dmin P r ofe ssion al O nly) Managing the Hyper-V application
To change VM settings
Note
When VM is running, some settings are read only. When VM is saved, all settings are read only. When VM is shut down, all settings are modifiable. On the VM Summary page, click Settings. In the text field, enter or select numeric values to change any of the following settings: Startup RAM (MB) Number of logical processors Virtual machine reserve (percentage) Virtual machine limit (percentage) Relative weight (1-10000) Click Save. If settings were saved, a message appears indicating success. If memory settings or processing settings are not successfully saved, a Fail message appears.
1 2
To view a summary of a VM snapshot

1 2
On the VM Summary page, click Snapshots. A list of snapshots of the VM appears. From the list, click a snapshot entry to view a summary of the snapshot. A snapshot summary appears and shows information such as Element name, Creation time, State, and so on. Click Back to return to the Snapshots page.
To create a snapshot of the VM

1 2 3
On the VM Summary page, click Create snapshot. A confirmation message appears. Click Ok. A message appears indicating that you have successfully created the snapshot. Click Ok. The refreshed Snapshot list appears.
To apply a snapshot of the VM When you apply a snapshot to a snapshot summary, the VM stops while the snapshot is being applied and then restarts when the snapshot or application completes.
1 2 3
On the Snapshot Summary page, click Apply Snapshot. A confirmation message appears. Click OK. A message appears indicating that you have successfully applied the snapshot. Click OK. The VM Summary screen appears.
To delete a snapshot of the VM

262
On the Snapshot Summary page, click Delete Snapshot.

Mobile Admin v. 5.1
Managing Microsoft Hyper-V (Mobile Admin Professional Only) Managing the Hyper-V application
The snapshot is deleted and you return to the Snapshot list screen. To manage the VM in Mobile Admin On the VM Summary page, click Manage VM. Mobile Admin displays a view of the services available to be managed on the VM host OS.
Mobile Admin v. 5.1
263
M anag ing M icroso ft Hyp er -V (Mo bile A dmin P r ofe ssion al O nly) Managing the Hyper-V application
264
Mobile Admin v. 5.1

Mobile Admin Client Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mobile Admin Client Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mobile Admin Client Installation and User Guide

software version 5.1

Mobile Admin v. 5.1

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

ii Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin v. 5.1

Mobile Admin v. 5.1

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

iv Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin v. 5.1

Mobile Admin v. 5.1

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin v. 5.1

Chapter 1 Introduction to Mobile Admin 1

Using Mobile Admin with BlackBerry smartphones 2

Chapter 2 Installing the Mobile Admin Client 9

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Chapter 3 Getting started with Mobile Admin 21

To modify credentials for an individual server 29 To apply credentials to a group of servers 30

Chapter 4 Managing Microsoft Windows 33

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Chapter 5 Connecting with SSH/Telnet 59

To manage connection settings (BlackBerry, Android, Windows Mobile, iPhone/iPod Touch) 61

Chapter 6 Connecting with RDP/VNC 67

Preparing for RDP/VNC connections 68

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Chapter 7 Managing Microsoft Active Directory 73

Managing computers 81 To view computers 81 To add a computer 81 To delete a computer 81

Chapter 8 Managing Microsoft Exchange 2000/2003 (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 83

Chapter 9 Managing Microsoft Exchange 2007 (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

To view transport settings 95

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

To create a mailbox filter (shortcut method) 103

To create a distribution group filter (shortcut method) 107

To create a mail contact filter (shortcut method) 111

To test system health 113

Chapter 10 Managing Microsoft SQL Servers (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Chapter 12 Managing Microsoft DHCP 139

Chapter 13 Managing Microsoft DNS 145

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Chapter 17 Managing Lotus Domino (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 165

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Chapter 18 Managing Novell (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 181

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Chapter 21 Managing Oracle (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

Mobile Admin v. 5.0

Chapter 22 Managing Citrix (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 223

Chapter 25 Managing Backup Exec (Mobile Admin Professional Only)

Chapter 26 Managing VMware Infrastructure (Mobile Admin Professional Only) 241

Mobile Admin Client: Installation and User Guide

Mobile Admin v. 5.0